JP6733710B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, it is provided with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball enters the actuation opening (starting ball entering means), whereby an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A game machine to execute is known (for example, refer to Patent Document 1). For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

JP, 2005-074175, A

However, since the variable prize winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area is entered, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. There is a problem of doing.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the player's attention to the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention allows the player to shoot a game ball toward the game area formed on the front surface of the game board, the game ball flowing down the game area, and an internal lottery for entering the game ball. Based on the result of the internal lottery executed by the entry of the game ball into the lottery means, the game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player, A gaming machine having a variable winning device that shifts to a state where a game ball can enter when a specific control state is reached, wherein the lottery means can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a lottery is performed. A guide piece having an open state for entering the means and a closed state for preventing game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means, and a guide piece drive set to the open or closed state by driving the guide piece The variable winning device is provided with a section, and a big winning opening for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball, an open state for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the big winning hole, and a game area. It has a closed state that does not allow the flowing down game ball to enter, and it is set to the open state or the closed state by driving the open/close door and the open/close door located downstream of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the guide piece. With a variable winning drive unit, the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state, and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. , Release the remaining game ball held by the guide piece, and the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening. Is characterized by.

According to the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Front view of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention Front view of the game board The front view of the game board which expanded the vicinity of the right operation port and the variable winning device. Figure showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Figure showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery The figure which shows the winning/losing table that stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. The figure which shows the distribution table which remembers the value of the random number which relates to the distribution destination of the jackpot type Diagram showing the flow chart of timer interrupt processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning a prize processing for the working mouth Diagram showing the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game time control processing The figure which shows the flowchart of data setting processing The figure which shows the flowchart of fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the setting processing of display continuation time. The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the special winning opening opening and closing processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the special winning opening opening processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with an audio emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of production decision processing Diagram showing the relationship between game results and game status The figure which shows the right operation mouth, the variable winning a prize device, and the symbol display device in the case where the winning/disapproving result becomes the "special disengagement result" after shifting to the high probability mode. The front view of the game board which expanded the vicinity of the right operation opening and the variable winning device which concern on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning a prize processing for the working mouth Diagram showing the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with an audio emission control device. The figure which shows the flowchart of the game ball counting processing The figure which shows the flowchart of production decision processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the production determination process at the time of closure. After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls are transmitted through the board surface of the electric accessory, and the winning/disabling result becomes the "special disengagement result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit is " The figure which shows the right operation mouth, the variable winning a prize device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set After moving to the high-probability mode, the two game balls travel down the board surface of the electric accessory, and the winning/disabling result becomes the "special miss result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit is " The figure which shows the right operation mouth, the variable winning a prize device, and the symbol display device when "50" is set After shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls are transmitted through the board surface of the electric accessory, and the winning/disabling result becomes the "special disengagement result", and the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit is " The figure which shows the right operation mouth, the variable winning a prize device, and the symbol display device when "200" is set The front view of the game board which expanded the vicinity of the right operation opening and the variable winning device which concern on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning a prize processing for the working mouth Diagram showing the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the processing for electric power support The figure showing the right operation port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device in the case where the result of the winning/disapproving result becomes the “special disengagement result” after the transition to the high-probability mode, and the upper electric auditors product lottery is won. The figure showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the winning/losing result becomes the “special miss result” after shifting to the high-probability mode and the upper electric auditors lottery is not won The front view of the game board which expanded the vicinity of the right operation opening and the variable winning device which concern on 4th Embodiment of this invention. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device After moving to the high-probability mode, the result of winning/disapproving is "special disengagement result", and a diagram showing the right operation opening, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the game ball is won in the big winning opening. After moving to the high-probability mode, the result of winning/disapproving is a "special outcome result", and a diagram showing the right operating port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the game ball does not win the big winning port. The front view of the game board which expanded the vicinity of the right operation opening and the variable winning device which concern on 5th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the right operation mouth, the variable winning a prize device, and the symbol display device in the case where the winning/disapproving result becomes the "special disengagement result" after shifting to the high probability mode.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko game machine which is a kind of game machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward (on the front side). 12 and.

The gaming machine main body 12 is arranged in front of the inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right sides being the support side, and on the left and right sides. The front door frame 13 supported by the inner frame so that one of the parts is supported on the support side and the front door frame 13 is arranged rearward of the inner frame, and one of the left and right side parts is supported on the rear side. And a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) provided at the turning front end thereof. This locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 13 with respect to the inner frame. Have These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 14 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 13 has a substantially oval window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but it may be made of synthetic resin and the like to be colorless and transparent.
Further, the front door frame 13 is provided with a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of a light emitting means constituted by various lamp portions provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion. 23 are provided on both left and right sides, and are provided with a speaker portion 24 that outputs a sound effect or the like according to a game situation, and an upper bulge portion 25 and a lower bulge portion 26 provided below the window portion 21. There is.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and both are bulged forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided on the inner side so as to open upward, and a push button 25b provided at the center of the upper plate 25a. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and while aligning them in a line, toward the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5) side. It has a function to guide. The push button 25b functions as an operation unit that executes an expected effect that causes the player to expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player when operated by the player.
The lower bulging portion 26 also has a lower plate 26a provided inside so as to open upward. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing the excess game balls in the upper plate 25a.

Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. This firing handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to fire a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. To do. The firing handle 27 changes the firing intensity of the game ball, which is fired toward the game area, that is, the momentum of the firing, by changing the rotation operation amount thereof.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The aforementioned game area is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. This game area can be visually recognized from the front through the window 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide rail 34 for the game ball to the game area, and the guide rail 34 is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the player rotating the launch handle 27. The played game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 34 is formed such that the exit portion thereof is arranged on one side of the game area and faces the upper center of the game area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31, a general winning opening 35 provided at each opening, a central working opening (first starting ball entering section) 36, a right working opening (second starting ball entering section) 37, a variable winning device 38, And an outlet 39. In addition, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the center left side and the center right side, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided at the center part, and the like. Have Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 planted in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling directions of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill in the game area. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 35, the central working opening 36, the right working opening 37, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38 is provided with detection sensors 40a to 40d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The detection sensors 40a to 40d are provided on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 40a, the central operation opening 36 includes a detection sensor 40b, the right operation opening 37 includes a detection sensor 40c, and the variable winning device 38 includes a detection sensor 40d. Equipped with. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40d. The detection sensors 40a to 40d may be of any type as long as they can individually detect the winning of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the central operation port 36 and when a ball enters the right operation port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball has entered the variable winning device 38. Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each of the operating ports 36 and 37 may be different.

The outlet 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through this out opening 39. Further, the outlet 39 is provided with a detection sensor 40e (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40e is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters the outlet 39, unlike when a ball enters the various prize holes.

Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 40f (see FIG. 5) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 40f is arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the payout of prize balls when a ball enters each through-gate 41, unlike when a ball enters each of the various winning openings.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish it from the game ball entering the out port 39, the game ball entering the various winning ports is also referred to as a prize. Further, the entry into the through gate 41 means to continue flowing down in the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. The entry into the through gate 41 is also referred to as a prize like the entry into various winning openings.

The central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 31. The central operating port 36 is provided so as to open upward so that a game ball flowing down in the game area can enter. The right operation port 37 is provided so as to open to the right so that the game ball flowing down the game area cannot be entered.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operation port and the variable winning device are enlarged.
As shown in FIG. 3, the right operation port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) configured by a substantially flat plate-like movable piece having a vertically upward plate surface formed in a wave shape. ing.
The player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 at the maximum, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side part side, the game ball can be guided to the right operation port 37 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The electric accessory 37a is provided to be inclined so as to descend toward the right operation port 37, and is connected to the electric accessory driving unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is driven by the electric accessory driver 37b to be set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). The closed state is a state in which the electric actuating member 37a is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right operating port 37 and the right operating port 37 is closed. In the open state, the electric accessory 37a is advanced toward the window panel 22 and projected from the game board 31, so that the game ball is inserted into the right operation port 37 and the right operation port 37 is opened. is there.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.
In addition, when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a on the vertically upper side, and enters the right operation port 37 along this plate surface. Will be done. At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is allowed to enter the right operation port 37 over a period of time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become.
Therefore, when the electric ball 37a is set to the closed state, the gaming ball cannot win the right operating port 37, and when the electric ball 37a is set to the open state, the right operating port 37 is placed. You can win.

The game board 31 has a right side outlet 391 provided on the right side of the electric accessory 37a. This right side outlet 391 is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. The right side outlet 391 has the same function as the outlet 39 provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 31. Specifically, the game ball that has entered the right-side outlet 391 merges with the game ball that has entered the outlet 39, and is then detected by the detection sensor 40e provided on the back side of the game board 31. It is like this.

The variable winning device 38 drives a big winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down a game area can be entered, an opening/closing door 38b for opening and closing the big winning opening 38a, and an opening/closing door 38b. The variable winning drive unit 38c is provided.
Note that the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 set to the maximum, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side on which the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side part side, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

Here, the game board 31 is provided with a cover 381 provided so as to cover the front surface side of the variable winning device 38. The cover 381 is provided with a transparent (or semi-transparent) transparent panel 381a so as to make the variable winning device 38 visible from the front side, and is provided around the transparent panel 381a and is opaque. And a panel 381b (see FIG. 2).
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window 21.

The special winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the special winning opening 38a includes the detection sensor 40d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the special winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a and retracting toward the inside of the game board 31 to the game board. By being buried in 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the special winning opening 38a is opened. Here, when the open/close door 38b is set to the closed state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface of the open/close door 38b on the vertically upper side, and flows down to the out port 39 side along this plate surface. I will go. At this time, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b is formed in a flat shape, so that the gaming ball flows down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. Then, it will immediately flow down to the outlet 39 side without taking time.
The variable winning drive unit 38c drives the opening/closing door 38b to set the opening/closing door 38b to either the open state or the closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which gaming balls cannot be won. Then, in the internal lottery, when the shift to the open/close execution mode is won and the shift to the open/close execution mode is made, the open/close door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can win.
The open/close execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the open/close door 38b is set in an open state so that a game ball can enter the special winning opening 38a. Further, in the open/close execution mode, after setting the open/close door 38b to the open state, it is called one round game until it is set to the closed state again.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the special winning opening 38a. The open/close door 38b advances toward the window panel 22 and projects from the game board 31, thereby closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a and retracting toward the inside of the game board 31 to play the game. By being buried in the board 31, it has an open state in which the opening of the special winning opening 38a is opened.
On the other hand, the open/close door may have a configuration other than this. For example, the opening/closing door may be formed in a rectangular plate shape and rotatably provided on the game board 31 with one side on the lower side as a central axis. In this case, the open/close door rotates toward the window panel 22 and projects from the game board 31, thereby opening the opening of the special winning opening 38a and turning the inside of the game board 31. It suffices to have a closed state of closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a by moving and burying it in the game board 31.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main display device 42 has a main display part 45 and a character display part 46, and a segment display or a dot display in which a plurality of segment light emitting parts are arranged in a predetermined mode. It is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is smaller than that for one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the main display device 42.

The main display part 45 includes a first result display part 45a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the central working opening 36, and an internal result based on the winning of the right working opening 37. The second result display unit 45b for displaying the result of the lottery is provided (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is set (or the opening/closing execution mode is set). ..

The first result display unit 45a executes the variable display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the central operating opening 36, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the central operating opening 36 as a result of stopping the variable display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the variable display of the pattern triggered by the winning of the right operating opening 37, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the right operating opening 37 as the result of the stop of the variable display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is the result corresponding to the shift to the open/close execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the central operating opening 36 and the right operating opening 37 function as starting ball entering means for entering the game ball flowing down the game area and executing the internal lottery when entering the game ball. To do.
Further, in the present embodiment, the right operation port 37 functions as a lottery means for entering a game ball that flows down in the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball is entered. This right operating port 37 is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and is in an open state in which the right operating port 37 is allowed to enter, and a closed state where the game ball flowing down in the game region is not allowed to enter the right operating port 37. An electric accessory 37a (guide piece) having a state and an electric accessory drive unit 37b (guide piece drive unit) that is driven to drive the electric accessory 37a to set the open state or the closed state.

The accessory display unit 46 executes the variable display of the pattern triggered by the winning of each through gate 41, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 as a result of the stop of the variable display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are configured by the segment display, but not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, It may be configured by another type of display device such as a dot matrix. In addition, as the patterns to be variably displayed on the main display section 45 and the accessory display section 46, a configuration of variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration of variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. Alternatively, a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted.

The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 47 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a kind of symbol. The variable display unit 43 also includes a center frame 48 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 47. The upper portion of the center frame 48 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the drop of the game ball. It is composed.

The symbol display device 47 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. This symbol display device 47 starts variable display of symbols based on winning in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. That is, the symbol display device 47 performs variable display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and variable display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 47 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 48 has a first holding lamp section 49a provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 47, a second holding lamp section 49b provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 47, and a symbol display. The third holding lamp section 49c provided in the upper region of the device 47 is provided.

The first holding lamp part 49a is a part for displaying the number of held game balls that have won in the central operating port 36, and lights up according to the number of held balls. The first hold lamp unit 49a can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 47.
The second holding lamp section 49b is a section for displaying the number of held game balls that have won in the right operation port 37, and lights up according to the number of held balls. The second hold lamp section 49b can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display section 45b and the symbol display device 47.
The third hold lamp section 49c is a section for displaying the number of held game balls that have won in each of the through gates 41, and lights up according to the number of held balls. The third hold lamp section 49c can hold up to four game balls and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display section 46.
Note that each of the holding lamp units 49a to 49c may have another configuration such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 47 described later.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 is divided into three columns of display areas, and in each display area, a left symbol column Z1, a middle symbol column Z2, and a right symbol are sequentially arranged from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, eight kinds of symbols consisting of the numbers “1” to “8” are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and “8” is arranged next to “1”. Is configured. In addition, in FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is shown by a dashed line.

The symbol display device 47 is configured to periodically scroll symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. By starting the variable display of the symbols, the effect for game play is executed on the display screen G. The production for this game use is changed from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. End with state.
That is, the game time is until the predetermined stop result is displayed after the variable display is started on the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 47 based on the winning of each of the operation ports 36 and 37.

The manner in which the symbols are displayed on the symbol display device 47 in a variable manner is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the scrolling direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the design of each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined instead of the mode in which only the numbers are used, or a mode in which only the pictures are used.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 executes a payout control device 70 that executes a payout control that causes the above-described payout device 71 to pay out a game ball, and a power supply that executes a discharge control that causes the above-described game ball launch mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball. And a firing control device 80, which are mounted on the backpack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game (main control), and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. This substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace when it is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace when it is opened. Specifically, as the trace means, a board box is configured by joining a plurality of case bodies, and a joining portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating the case bodies is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace that the adhesive layer has been peeled off by being left on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that configure the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In addition, in this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be configured into individual chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information. The ROM 63 has various areas such as a win/loss table storage area 63a, a distribution table storage area 63b, a reach table storage area 63c, and a display duration table storage area 63d. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply when holding the stored information. Is. The RAM 64 has various areas such as various counter areas 64a, holding ball storage areas 64b, and electric-worker holding areas 64c. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. In addition, the output port of the MPU 62 is an electric accessory driving unit 37b that opens and closes the electric accessory 37a of the right operation port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. It is connected to the part 45 and the accessory display part 46.

The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric role object driving unit 37b to open and close the electric role object 37a. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open/close the special winning opening 38a. In addition, in each game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the operation openings 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V output from the power supply/launch control device 80. .. Therefore, the MPU 62 receives electric power via the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 40a to 40f are in a one-to-one correspondence with the general winning opening 35, the central working opening 36, the right working opening 37, the various winning openings of the variable winning device 38, the out opening 39, and the through gates 41. It is provided. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40a to 40f, the MPU 62 makes a prize determination (ball determination) to each of the various winning openings, the outlet 39, and each through gate 41. The MPU 62 executes the internal lottery based on the winning determination to the central operating opening 36 or the right operating opening 37.

The payout control device 70 executes a payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball or a lending ball (a game ball to lend to a player during a game) based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60. To do.

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, the power supply/launch control device 80 generates operation power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, and the generated operation. Supply power. The power supply/launch control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and storage to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 even when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

Further, the power supply/launch control device 80 executes a firing control for causing the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 81 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeder for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is provided with a solenoid which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34. The power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to launch a game ball when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes the internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot occurrence lottery and, when the jackpot occurs, uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery to determine whether or not to reach. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time in the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 47. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the right operation port 37 is opened. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is regularly updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are RAM64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating opening 36 or the right operating opening 37. It is stored in the reserved sphere storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as the acquisition information storage means in FIG. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric auditors product release counter C4 is stored in the electric player holding area 64c (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. To be done.

The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display reserved area Ra, a second result display reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The 1st result display part reservation area Ra provided as a 1st acquisition information storage means is equipped with four storage areas, 1st area Ra1-4th area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the sets of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in chronological order in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into the central operating opening 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62, in the case where the winning to the central working opening 36 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→the second area Ra2→the third area Ra3→the fourth area Ra4. Store in time series.

As described above, since the first result display holding area Ra has four storage areas, the maximum winning of the game balls to the central operating opening 36 is set to four. Further, the first result display holding area Ra has a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
It should be noted that the number of reserves related to the central operation port 36 is not limited to four and may be any number, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, and is a single number. May be.

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas, namely, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses the sets of the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in chronological order in the areas Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball into the right operation port 37. Store it. Specifically, when the winning to the right operation port 37 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the MPU 62 provides the reservation information in the order of the first area Rb1, the second area Rb2, the third area Rb3, and the fourth area Rb4. Store in time series.

As described above, since the second result display holding area Rb has four storage areas, the winning of the game balls to the right operation port 37 is held up to a maximum of four. The second result display holding area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of holdings stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
It should be noted that the number of reserves for the right operation port 37 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, and is a single number. May be.

The execution area AE is the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb when the variable display of the respective result display portions 45a and 45b is started. Is an area for moving.

The power combination holding area 64c includes four storage areas like the first result displaying section holding area Ra and the second result displaying section holding area Rb. Therefore, the winning of the game balls to each through gate 41 is set to be held up to a maximum of four.
It should be noted that the number of reserved gates associated with each through gate 41 is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, and is a single number. May be.

<Detailed description of each counter>
The details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and reaching the maximum value 250 and then returning to 0. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric power reserve area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. It
Then, the MPU 62 performs a lottery (electric role) whether or not the electric role 37a of the right operation port 37 is placed in the electric role open state based on the value of the electric role open counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 64c. Opening lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequencies at which the game balls can be won in the right operation port 37 are different from each other by setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state is relatively low, and a frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. It has a relatively high high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both are 4/5). However, the high-frequency support mode sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state more often when the electric role is opened than in the low-frequency support mode, and sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state. The one-time opening time is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state is shorter than the opening time of one time during each opening of the electric power opening state of one time. Further, the high-frequency support mode is, compared with the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role) that is waited after the completion of the electric auditors' item open lottery until the next electric auditors' item open lottery. The duration of one fluctuation display on the object display unit 46 is short.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win the right working opening 37 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player hits the left with the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 27 at a middle level, and the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed at the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area. By shifting from the side portion side to the center portion, it is possible to increase the probability of winning in the central operation opening 36 rather than the right operation opening 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is on the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from one side to the opposite side, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the right working opening 37 more than the central working opening 36.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 easily causes the game ball to enter the central working opening 36 and does not easily enter the game ball into the right working opening 37. 1 route) and a right-handed route (second route) that easily causes the game ball to enter the right operating port 37 and does not easily enter the game ball to the central operating port 36. There is.

The configurations of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured such that the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory release lottery is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of securing time may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured so that a short securing time can be easily selected as compared with the low frequency support mode. May be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high-frequency support mode sets the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state to the low-frequency support mode. You may comprise so that it may be made relatively high compared with.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 599. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it makes a loop. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating opening 36 or the right operating opening 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central working opening 36, and the game ball wins the right working opening 37. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at a timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery (win/win lottery) based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a win/loss table in which the values of the random numbers that win the jackpot are stored.
As shown in FIG. 7, among the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the big hit is stored in the win/loss table storage area 63a (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the win/loss information group storage means. It is stored as (a hit/miss information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning/missing lottery modes, a low-probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit and a high-probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big hit. .. The win/loss table is a win/loss table (low probability win/loss information group) for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7A and a win/loss table (high probability win/loss information for high probability) shown in FIG. 7B. Group) and.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery by comparing these win/loss tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

These win/loss tables have a plurality of jackpot occurrence results (win/win results) of “big hit”, “special miss result”, and “normal miss result”.
Specifically, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, as shown in FIG. 7A, there are two random number values for the "jackpot win". The value of the random number that is the “special deviation result” is two, and the value of the random number that is the “normal deviation result” is any other value. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, the probability that the win/loss result will be “big hit” and “special failure result” is 1/300 each, The probability that the hit/fail result will be a "normal failure result" is 298/300.

On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, as shown in FIG. 7(b), there are 21 random number values for the "jackpot win". The value of the random number that is the “normal deviation result” is 28, and the value of the random number that is the “special deviation result” is any other value. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the big hit occurrence, the probability that the win/win result is "big win" is about 1/30, and the win/fail result is "special out-of-match". The probability of being a “result” is about 11/12, and the probability of a win/fail result being a “normal failure result” is about 1/20.

It should be noted that the value and the number of random numbers stored in each win/loss table are arbitrary, and the high-probability mode has only to have a higher probability of being a “big hit” than the low-probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the “big win” stored in the high probability mode win/loss table does not include the value of the random number that becomes the “big win” stored in the low probability mode win/loss table. Alternatively, it may include a part of the value of the random number that is “big hit” stored in the win/loss table for the low probability mode.

In addition, in each winning/unwinning lottery mode, except for the value of the random number which is “big hit”, the big hit is not won and the result is a win.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of disconnection results, that is, "special disconnection result (small hit result)" and "normal disconnection result". All of these deviation results are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the win/loss lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special disengagement result" is a trigger to shift to the open/close execution mode, whereas the "normal disengagement result" is not a trigger to transition to the open/close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 29. ..
The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserve ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating opening 36 or the right operating opening 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central working opening 36, and the game ball wins the right working opening 37. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at a timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b, when the jackpot occurs, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a distribution table that stores the values of random numbers related to the distribution destinations of the jackpot type.
As shown in FIG. 8, the value of the random number related to the sorting destination of the jackpot type is stored in the sorting table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as the sorting information group storage means. It is stored as a minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8A and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 8B. ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the central operating opening 36. It is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery for jackpot types.
As shown in FIG. 8A, the first distribution table includes “low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)”, “explicit small round high accuracy result (high probability result corresponding to small round)”. , And a plurality of distribution results of “most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)” are distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first allocation table, among the values “0 to 29” of the big hit type counter C2, “0 to 9” are allocated to “low accuracy result”, and “10 to 19” is defined as “explicit small round”. It assigns to "high accuracy result" and "20 to 29" to "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the right operation opening 37. It is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery for jackpot types.
As shown in FIG. 8B, the second distribution table has two distribution results of “low probability result” and “most favorable result” as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0 to 9” are distributed to “low accuracy result” and “10 to 29” is defined as “most advantageous result”. ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winning/losing lottery mode after completion of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after completion of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the winning/winning lottery modes of (1) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the win/loss lot mode is set to the low-probability mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until the "big win" is reached in the winning/discarding lottery.
“Explicit small round high-probability result” and “most advantageous result” are distribution results in which the win/loss lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until the “big hit” is achieved in the winning/discarding lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of game times reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

“Explicit small round high-precision result” and “most advantageous result” are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until the "big win" is reached in the winning/discarding lottery.

It should be noted that the difference in the manner of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 238, and then returning to 0. ..
The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the central operating opening 36 or the right operating opening 37. Stored in. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the central working opening 36, and the game ball wins the right working opening 37. It is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at a timing.
Then, the MPU 62 carries out a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not the reach display is generated based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the result is "normally out of stock" without being "big hit" in the win/loss lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the "normal win result" is obtained without the "big hit" in the win/loss lottery. By comparing with, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the reach display should be generated, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 63c (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63.

Here, in the win/no win lottery, when it becomes a “big hit” and is distributed to the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. The combination of the symbols having the numbers is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. In addition, in the win/no win lottery, when the result is “big hit” and is distributed to the “low probability result” in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 47 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. Is stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Furthermore, in the win/loss lottery, it will be a "big win", and in the sorting lottery, it will be a "special win result" without being a "big jackpot win", or if it is distributed to the "explicit small round high accuracy result". In this case, the symbol display device 47 does not have a combination of symbols having the same number as the stop result, but has mutually different numbers that are not selected when the result is “out of normal” in the win/loss lottery. The special symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line L.

The reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is finally stopped and displayed ("big hit" in the win/loss lottery, and is distributed to the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" in the sorting lottery. In the case of), regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when a special combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when the winning/winning lottery results in a “big hit” and when the distribution lottery is assigned to the “explicit small round high-precision result”, In the win/loss lottery, if the “special win result” does not occur and the “special win result” does not occur, it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In the reach display mode, some of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 are part of the symbol columns (for example, the symbol column Z1 and the symbol column Z3) on the activated line L. By the stop display, the same symbol combination is displayed to suggest the stop result, and in that state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, the symbol row Z2) are variably displayed.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 generates a reach display, and after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47, and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, it becomes a “big hit prize” in the win/loss lottery. It is possible to make the player expect that it may have been sorted into the “low probability result” or the “most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery.

Note that the reach display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows is stopped and displayed while the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background. Alternatively, each symbol row may be reduced or displayed, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 47. With the expected effect, after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 47 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player is expected to have become a “big hit” in the win/loss lottery. Say production. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, which are the reach display and the notice display described above.

The advance notice will not be a “big win” in the win/win lottery if the “big win” is won in the win/win lottery or if the “special failure result” is not given in the win/win lottery This is an expected performance that makes it easier to generate an effect than in the case of the "normal disengagement result". Instead of facilitating the production of the effects, the notice display may facilitate the selection of the effects having a low appearance rate, or may combine these.
It should be noted that the lottery as to whether or not to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery or not as to whether to generate the advance notice display is executed by the voice emission control device 90. ..

The mode of the notice display is that some of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 among the plurality of symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 are variably displayed (for example, some symbol columns). A predetermined character in a situation in which a plurality of symbol columns (for example, symbol columns Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed after the symbol column Z1) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L, or a reach display is generated. Are displayed as a moving image on the display screen G. This notice display is generated both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set to be more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done.
The notice display is not limited to this. For example, the background may be changed and displayed, or the form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 198, and then returning to 0. ..
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once every time a normal process described below is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 45 and the display duration of the symbol on the symbol display device 47 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer.

<Various processing executed by main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes a timer interrupt process and a normal process for advancing a game, and a main process which is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S101 to S105 (for example, in a 2 msec cycle), as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes the reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f, determines the states, and stores the states in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 40a to 40d corresponding to the various winning openings detect the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets the prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 detects the winning of a game ball, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls as a specific unit number. To the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to perform payout of prize balls, based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. If the maximum value is reached when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the MPU 62 resets the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and updates the values. The subsequent value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Note that the MPU 62 resets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them when the maximum values are reached when adding 1 to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a through winning process. In this winning process for through, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 40f corresponding to each through gate 41 detects the winning of the game ball, the electric auditors release counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the electric power holding area 64c. Further, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the third holding lamp section 49c, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 turns on the third hold lamp unit 49c based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp section 49c lights up by a number corresponding to this reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operating port.
The winning process for the working opening will be described in detail below.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 40b corresponding to the central operating port 36 has detected the winning of the game ball, thereby determining whether or not the central operating port 36 has won the game ball (starting winning). Determine whether.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won in the central operation opening 36, in step S202, it grasps the number of reserves stored in the first result display reserve area Ra and reserves it. The number is set as a first start pending storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the first result display holding area Ra. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S207 and thereafter.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that no game ball has been won in the central operating opening 36, in step S203 the detection sensor 40c corresponding to the right operating opening 37 wins the game ball. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) in the right operation port 37.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not been won in the right operation port 37, it ends the winning process for the operation port. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won the right operation opening 37, in step S204, it grasps the number of reserves stored in the second result display reserve area Rb, The reserved number is set as a second starting reserved memory number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the second result display retaining area Rb.

In step S205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the winning/winning lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S207 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S206, the MPU 62 executes the right operating port closing execution process. In the closing execution process of the right operation port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball into the right operation port 37, the electric operation is performed. The accessory 37a is set in the closed state. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S207 and thereafter.

After executing the processing of step S202 or step S206, or when determining in step S205 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the start suspension set in step S202 or step S204 is set. It is determined whether or not the stored number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment).
When the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the number N of startup pending memories is not less than the upper limit value, it ends the winning process for the operating port. If the MPU 62 determines in step S207 that the number N of startup pending storages is less than the upper limit value, it updates the value of the number N of startup pending storages by adding 1 in step S208.

In step S209, the MPU 62 sets a combination of the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interruption process among the free storage areas of the result display section holding area. The information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number N of startup suspension memories updated in step S208 as suspension information.

For example, when the first startup pending storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 62 determines each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as the hold information in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first result display holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S208. For example, when the MPU 62 sets “3” in the first startup hold storage number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 sets the storage area corresponding to “4” of the first startup hold storage number RaN updated in step S208. The reservation information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

Further, for example, when the second start pending storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. Each set of values is stored in the first result storage area of the second result display section hold area Rb as the hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S208. To do. For example, when the MPU 62 sets “3” in the second startup pending storage number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 sets the storage area corresponding to “4” in the second startup pending storage number RbN updated in step S208. The reservation information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

In step S209, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the first holding lamp section 49a or the second holding lamp section 49b, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port.
The sound emission control device 90 turns on the first holding lamp unit 49a or the second holding lamp unit 49b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of game balls that can be won in the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37 is four, and the first retaining lamp section 49a or the second retaining lamp section 49b can retain this number of retained balls. Lights up to the number corresponding to.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process which is a main process for advancing a game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes steps S312 and subsequent steps in accordance with the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes a timer interrupt process or an external output process for transmitting the command set in the previous normal process to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and when it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. In addition, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a command for production such as a command corresponding to the effect for game play or a command corresponding to the effect for opening/closing execution mode is set, and the command for effect is determined. When it is determined that the effect is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS and updates it, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. .. Note that the MPU 62 resets the value of the fluctuation type counter CS to 0 and clears it when the maximum value is reached when 1 is added to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game number control process for advancing the game number. In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes win/loss lottery and distribution lottery, determines information about a design to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 47, and finally and stop-displays on the main display unit 45. The determination of information related to is executed.
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes the process of transitioning to each game state such as the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game number control process of step S303 and the game state transition process of step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes a demo display execution determination process. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game time after the game time ends. However, when it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 62.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S305. For example, when the start waiting period is 30 sec and the interval at which the process of step S305 is repeatedly executed is 4 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 7500 when the start waiting period is reached. Is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Further, if the MPU 62 starts a new game time while counting the number of executions of the process of step S305, it resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37. In the electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role open lottery based on the value of the electric role open counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role open lottery is executed. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the open state. Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed without the game ball winning the right operation opening 37 after setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state, the MPU 62 drives the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. In the game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power/launch control device 80 to launch a launch ball based on the player rotating the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply/launch control device 80 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting a solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 sec in this embodiment). .. The solenoid is excited so as to emit a game ball with a firing intensity according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 27. Further, the power supply/launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it is confirmed that a power failure has occurred. It should be noted that this power failure flag is cleared at the next execution of the main processing.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 into the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 into the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is set, the MPU 62 executes the process at the time of power interruption after step S312 without executing the process after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set, it determines in step S309 whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, the current normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has not come, that is, when the remaining time has occurred, in step S310, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and then in step S311. At, the change type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, if the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes step S301 again to execute the next process. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (control board of the sound emission control device 90, etc.) to become operable. ) Has elapsed.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. If the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S403 and the subsequent steps.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S402. For example, when the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the process of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the count reaches 10,000. The configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/fire control device 80 is turned on.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S409 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S409 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is set, it calculates the RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value stored in the normal processing step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption), and when these match, , The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

Then, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S409 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is assigned to a predetermined area of the RAM 64 during the power interruption process. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by writing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set, or the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processing from step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the game arcade can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of the business of the game arcade. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the power failure monitoring board 65 has not confirmed the occurrence of a power failure or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the processing of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (the control board of the sound emission control device 90, etc.) in step S411, and in step S412, a timer interrupt. The generation of the process is permitted, and the process shifts to the normal process described above.
Note that the sub-side control board recognizes that the communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed by receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, and executes its own initialization. To do.

<Game time control processing>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game number control process.
In the game time control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether it is in the open/close execution mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is in effect, it ends the game number control processing without executing the processing of step S502 and thereafter. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the game times regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operating ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 determines whether the open/close execution mode is in operation by referring to the open/close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64. The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 62 sets the open/close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open/close execution mode, and clears the open/close execution mode flag at the end of the open/close execution mode.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, that is, the game game is in progress. Or not.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not being displayed in a variable manner, the MPU 62 executes the game times start process of steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display portion 45 is being variably displayed, the MPU 62 executes the game time progression processing of steps S506 to S509.

First, the game times start process of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reserves stored in the first result display section reserve area Ra and the number of reserves stored in the second result display section reserve area Rb, and reserves these numbers. It is determined whether the total number CRN of is less than or equal to "0". When the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0", the game number control process ends.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504 the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Ra. A data setting process for setting the hold information stored in Rb for digesting the game is executed. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 to start the variable display and executes the fluctuation start process for digesting the game time, and ends the game time control process.
Hereinafter, the data setting process of step S504 and the fluctuation start process of step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second startup hold storage number RbN of the second result display section hold area Rb set in step S204 of the winning process for the working opening is “0” or less. To do. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second startup pending storage number RbN is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606, and proceeds to step S601. When it is determined that the second start pending storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

As described above, the data setting process includes the data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit for digesting the game times, and the second result display unit. It has a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for use for digesting game times.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second startup pending storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 does not perform the data setting process for the first result display unit and does not execute the second result display unit. Data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the right working opening 37, the MPU 62 moves to the central working opening 36. Based on the winning of the game ball, the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb is preferentially played regardless of whether there is the holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra. Set for digestion once.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first startup hold storage number RaN in the first result display holding area Ra and updates the value.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the holding information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process of shifting the holding information stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reservation information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reservation information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, the reservation information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and the reservation information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. This second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which main display unit 45 of the first result display unit 45a and the second result display unit 45b is to start the variable display when the game number is exhausted. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display unit flag, when the game number is exhausted, a variable display is displayed on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the central operating port 36. Indicates that it is to be started.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the holding information shift has been executed, transmits the set shift time command to the voice light emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that indicates that the holding information is shifted for the holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to the central operating opening 36. It contains information for the 90 to recognize.
The sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp section 49a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the voice emission control device 90 decreases the number of the first holding lamp parts 49a to be turned on as the number of holding game balls that have won in the central operation port 36 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second startup hold storage number RbN of the second result display holding area Rb and updates the value.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the holding information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process of shifting the reservation information stored in the storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reservation information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the reservation information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, the reservation information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and the reservation information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 has set the second result display unit flag, upon completion of the game round, based on the winning of the game ball into the right operation port 37, the variable display is displayed on the second result display unit 45b. Indicates that it is to be started.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift time command for recognizing that the holding information is shifted, transmits the set shift time command to the voice light emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This shift command is a voice emission control device that indicates that the holding information is shifted for the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the right operation opening 37. It contains information for the 90 to recognize.
The sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp section 49b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of the second holding lamp parts 49b to be turned on as the number of holding game balls that have won the right operation opening 37 decreases.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high probability mode, in step S702, the win/loss table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 7A) is read from the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is read and it is determined in step S701 that the win/win lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/loss table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 7B) is read from the win/loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 in step S703. read out.

After executing the processing of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the hit/miss determination processing in step S704. In this win/loss determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win/loss table read out in step S702 or step S703 to determine the win/loss result (win/win result). To judge. In addition, as described above, the win/loss result is one of the “big hit prize”, the “special miss result”, and the “normal miss result”. The same is true.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning/swapping result determined in step S704 is “big hit”. When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/no win result is “big hit”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S706 and subsequent steps, and when the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/no win result is not “big hit”. , And the processing from step S712 onward.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the win/no win result is “big hit” in step S705 (the processing after step S706) will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64 in step S706, the variable display is started on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball into the central working opening 36. This means that the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S707.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball into the right operation port 37. Since the variable display is started, the second distribution table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 in step S708.

After executing the processing of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes the distribution determination processing in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( (Sorting result) is determined.

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot result stop result setting process. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 the information related to the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 compares the distribution result determined in step S709 with the jackpot result stop result table stored in advance in the ROM 63 to determine the final stop display on the main display unit 45. Determine the relevant information. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets in the RAM 64 a flag according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a “low accuracy result”, it sets the low accuracy result flag and determines that it is an “explicit small round high accuracy result”. Is set to an explicit small round high-probability result flag, and when it is specified that it is the "most advantageous result", the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S716.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes the determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, a process (process after step S712) in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the win/no win result is not “big hit” in step S705 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/fail result determined in step S704 is a “special out-of-match result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the winning/disapproving result is the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S713 and subsequent steps, and when the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the winning/disapproving result is not the “special out-of-match result”. For that, the processing from step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the special disengagement result. In the stop result setting process for the special disengagement result, the MPU 62 determines the information regarding the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination thereof. The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information relating to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special disconnection result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special disengagement result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the big hit result.
In step S714, the MPU 62 sets the special removal flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 refers to the special disconnection flag to determine whether or not the win/fail result is the “special disconnection result”.

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes the stop result setting process for the normal disconnection result. In the stop result setting process for the normal disengagement result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the picture finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines the information regarding the design to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal disengagement result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the big hit result and the stop result table for the special disengagement result.

After executing any one of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 62 executes the setting process of the display continuation time (display continuation period) in step S716.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a display continuation time setting process.
In the display continuation time setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S808 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special detachment flag is set in the RAM 64.

When the MPU 62 determines that the special detachment flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S802 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the special detachment flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S806.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the special detachment flag is not set in the RAM 64 (processing after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

In step S803, the MPU 62 determines whether or not reach display is generated on the symbol display device 47. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result determined in step S709 is the “low probability result” or the “most advantageous result” and the win/fail result determined in step S704 is the “normal outlier result”. At the same time, when the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display is generated. As described above, the MPU 62 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Perform the reach generation lottery.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the reach display is generated, the MPU 62 reads the reach generation display duration time table stored in the display duration time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 in step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the reach display does not occur, in step S805, the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. read out.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that the special off flag is set in the RAM 64 (processing after step S806) will be described.
In step S806, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode.

When it is determined in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (when it is determined that the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode), the MPU 62 executes the processing in step S802 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the win/no win lottery mode is determined to be the high-probability mode in step S806, the MPU 62, in step S807, stores the special display duration time stored in the display duration time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. Read out.

After executing the processing of any of step S804, step S805, and step S807, the MPU 62 determines the display duration time in step S808. Specifically, when the reach occurrence display continuation time table or the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table is read, the MPU 62 obtains from the fluctuation type counter buffer by referring to each display continuation time table. The display continuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is decided, and the decided display continuation time is set in the display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. When reading the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in this embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64.
The special display duration is shorter than the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

Here, the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table is set so that the display continuation time is shortened as the number of held items increases. Therefore, the display continuation time when the holding information related to the central operating port 36 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of holding information related to the central operating port 36 increases. The display continuation time when the hold information related to the right operation port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of reservations related to the right operation port 37 increases. Further, the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table is set to shorten the display continuation time when the support mode is the high frequency support mode as compared with the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration time in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

Note that the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be set in a relationship opposite to the above-mentioned relationship, such as increasing the display duration as the number of held items increases. The configuration may not change. Further, the display continuation time table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the distribution result.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process, the processes in and after step S717 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The variation command includes information regarding the display duration time. Further, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not reach display is generated.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually Different.
Therefore, even if the variation command does not include the information indicating whether or not the reach display is generated, the reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information related to the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not reach display is generated. The variation command may directly include information as to whether or not reach display is generated.

Also, the special display duration is shorter than the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the reach non-occurrence display duration table, so it is based on the information related to the display duration. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not the display duration time is the special display duration time by the audio emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes the information on the special display duration. The variation command may directly include information on the special display duration time.

The type command includes information related to the result of winning or rejecting. In other words, the type command includes, as information relating to the winning/discarding result, information relating to “big hit”, “special failure result”, and “normal failure result”. Further, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes, as information relating to the distribution result, information relating to “low probability result”, “explicit small round high probability result”, and “most advantageous result”.
In the following description, the winning/discarding result and the distribution result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start the variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 62 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first, based on the winning of the game ball into the central operating port 36, when the game number is exhausted, Since it indicates that the variable display is started on the result display section 45a, the first result display section 45a is caused to start the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second based on the winning of the game ball to the right operating port 37 when the game number is exhausted. Since it is indicated that the variable display is started on the result display unit 45b, the variable display is started on the second result display unit 45b.

Returning to the explanation of the game time control processing, the game time proceeding processing of steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, and when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display, for the game time progression of steps S506 to S509. Execute the process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display continuation time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variable display process, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display unit 45 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game number control process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, in step S508, the variation end process is executed. In this variation ending process, the MPU 62 performs the information (main information stored in the RAM 64 in the process of any one of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation starting process executed when starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 (main The information regarding the design finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45 is specified. Then, at the end of the game game, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the main display unit 45 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display unit 45 which is being variably displayed.

Here, the design that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by visually checking the main display section 45 at the end of the game game. According to this, for example, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes the pachinko machine 10 to perform the same behavior as when the lottery for jackpot occurrence is won. Can be done on a regular basis.
Further, the main display unit 45 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 are the sequence of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. It is difficult for the player to recognize as compared with Z1 to Z3. Therefore, at the time of the end of the game, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 47, not the main display unit 45, to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won. The degree of attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets the fluctuation end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game number control process.
The voice emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game time, based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to end the effect of the game time independently without the need to receive the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S917 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether it is in the open/close execution mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open/close execution mode is not being executed, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S902 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open/close execution mode is in effect, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S914.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect (the processing after step S902) will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has not ended, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the hit/miss result corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode. Determine whether. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning/swapping result is a “big hit winning” or a “special failure result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the winning/disapproval result corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the open/close execution mode flag in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S904.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the shift to the open/close execution mode (when it is determined that the win/fail result is the “normal disconnection result”), the game is played. The state transition process ends.

In step S904, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning/failing result is the “special out-of-match result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the winning/disapproving result is the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S905 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the winning/disapproval result is not the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S911 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/fail result is the “special out-of-match result” (processing after step S905) will be described.
In step S905, the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in each counter area 64a of the RAM 64. The open/close counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify the total number of times of opening/closing the special winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the open/close execution mode.

In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907, the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 has a waiting time for starting small hits (standby). Set "50" as the period. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec. The waiting time for starting the small hit is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S908, the MPU 62 sets a small hit command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing. This small hit command includes information on the game result that triggered the shift to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the small hit command set in step S908 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the open/close execution mode based on the small hit command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (when it determines that the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode), in step S909, the various counters of the RAM 64 are counted. The timer counter T provided in the area 64a is set to "1000" as the opening waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 seconds. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S910, the MPU 62 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the shift to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S910 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the open/close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

Next, in step S904, a process (a process after step S911) when the MPU 62 determines that the winning/disapproving result is not the “special deviation result” will be described.
In step S911, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the small round high accuracy result (“explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the distribution result is the small round high-precision result, the MPU 62 sets "2" in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S912. If the MPU 62 determines in step S911 that the distribution result is not the small round high-accuracy result, that is, if the distribution result is the “low-accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result”, In S913, "15" is set in the round counter RC. The round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 62 to specify the number of round games when shifting to the open/close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open/close execution modes with different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as an opening/closing execution mode, a round number defining mode that shifts when the win/fail result is "big hit" and the number of opening/closing that shifts when the win/fail result is "special miss result". And a specified mode.

The round number defining mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number defining mode ends on the condition that the opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This open/closed number regulation mode does not end on the condition of the number of times the round game is executed.

The pachinko machine 10 executes the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a once for each round game. In addition, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state and then sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying any one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. (2) The total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number.

After executing the processing of step S912 or step S913, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S909 and subsequent steps described above.

In this way, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode, regardless of the type of game result, except for the special outlier result in the high probability mode. The waiting time for opening is set in the timer counter T. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result, except for the special miss result of the high probability mode.
In addition, the waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of the game result so that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different depending on whether the game result is a “low certainty result” or a “most advantageous result” or a game result other than these, etc. The configuration may be made to differ greatly depending on the type.

Next, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in the open/close execution mode in step S901 (the processing after step S914) will be described.
In step S914, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening/closing process.

FIG. 18 is a view showing a flowchart of the special winning opening/closing process.
In the special winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1025, as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether the special winning opening 38a is open.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the special winning opening 38a is not open, it executes the processing of step S1002 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the special winning opening 38a is open, it executes the processing of step S1006 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is not open in step S1001 (processing after step S1002) will be described.
In step S1002, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less, the special winning opening/closing processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the timer counter T It is determined whether the value is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", the special winning opening opening/closing process ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the special winning opening opening process in step S1004.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening process of step S1004 will be described in detail.

FIG. 19 is a view showing a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process.
In the special winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1107 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/fail result is the “special out-of-match result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning/disapproval result is the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 sets “1” in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1102, and the step In step S1103, the timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning/discarding result is not the “special out-of-match result”, the winning counter PC is set to “8” in step S1104, and the distribution result is determined in step S1105. Is a small round high accuracy result (“explicit small round high accuracy result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is the small round high-accuracy result, it sets "85" in the timer counter T in step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not the small round high-accuracy result, it sets "15000" in the timer counter T in step S1106. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S1103 or step S1106, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution processing of the special winning opening 38a in step S1107. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b in the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1102 or step S1104 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a.
Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 defines the upper limit duration time after the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations of different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000" as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 has a long-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec (long-term mode) and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that in the long-term mode (short period). Mode) and are set.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec, as described above. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning/disapproval result is not the “special miss result”, as described above, the winning counter PC is set to “8”, whereby the game to the special winning opening 38a is performed. The upper limit of the total number of winning balls is set to eight.
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of the game balls to the special winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and thus the upper limit of 8 game balls. It is easy to make a prize in the special winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing of the game balls). Since it is shorter than the cycle), it is difficult to win the game ball into the special winning opening 38a. In addition, depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the special winning opening 38a.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the winning/disapproval result is the “special out-of-match result”, as described above, the winning counter PC is set to “1” so that the special winning opening 38a is won. The upper limit of the total number of winning game balls is set to one. And, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of the game balls to the special winning opening 38a and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing cycle of the game balls). Since it is short), it is difficult to win the game ball into the special winning opening 38a. In addition, depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the special winning opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the special winning opening/closing processing, the processing after step S1005 will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the special winning opening opening process of step S1004, the MPU 62 sets an opening command in step S1005. This release command includes information related to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time the round game is executed. In other words, the release command includes information on the number of times the round game is executed. Further, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening/closing process.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, a process (process after step S1006) when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is open in step S1001 will be described.
In step S1006, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is “0” or less. That is, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1106 of the special winning opening opening process has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1007 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1018 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (processing after step S1007) will be described.
In step S1007, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the special winning opening 38a. The determination as to whether or not a winning has occurred in the special winning opening 38a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 40d corresponding to the special winning opening 38a.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that no winning of the special winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening/closing processing.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that a prize has been awarded to the special winning opening 38a, it updates the value of the prize counter PC by subtracting 1 from it in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the payout counter PC is not "0" or less, it ends the special winning opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process in step S1010. In the closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 38b in the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning award driving unit 38c.

In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a close command. This closing command includes information related to the round counter RC. The value of the round counter RC is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC each time the round game is executed. In other words, the close command includes information on the number of times the round game has been executed. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/fail result is the “special out-of-match result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the winning/disapproval result is the “extra outcome result”, the MPU 62 sets the value of the open/close counter SOC to “0”, and then executes the processing of step S1024 and subsequent steps to be described later.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the winning/disapproval result is not the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1013 and thereafter.
In step S1013, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.

In step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, it sets "500" to the value of the timer counter T in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is the opening waiting time after the open/close door 38b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again until the open/close door 38b is set to the open state again. It defines the time. In the present embodiment, the release waiting time is 1 sec. The opening waiting time is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode and the progress status.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S1016 and subsequent steps.
In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets "2000" in the timer counter T as the ending waiting time (waiting period). As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 seconds. The waiting time for ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for ending is the same as the waiting time for opening, regardless of the type of game result, except for the special miss result of the high probability mode. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode, except for the special deviation result of the high probability mode.
The waiting time for ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, for example, to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different depending on whether it is a "low certainty result" or a "most advantageous result" game result and a game result other than these, etc. The configuration may be made to differ greatly depending on the type.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets the ending command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening/closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the open/close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S1006, a process (process after step S1018) when the value of the timer counter T is determined to be “0” or less by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1018, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process as in step S1010 described above.
In step S1019, the MPU 62 sets the close command as in step S1011 described above.

In step S1020, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/fail result is the “special out-of-match result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the winning/discarding result is not the “special out-of-match result”, that is, if the winning/discarding result is “big hit”, it executes the process of step S1021 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the winning/disapproval result is the “special out-of-match result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1023 and subsequent steps.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines in step S1020 that the winning/disapproving result is not the “special deviation result” (processing after step S1021) will be described.
In step S1021, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.

In step S1022, the MPU 62 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1015 and subsequent steps described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1022 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than “0”, the MPU 62 executes the above-described processing of step S1016 and subsequent steps.

Next, in step S1020, a process (process after step S1023) in the case where the MPU 62 determines that the hit/miss result is the “special miss result” will be described.
In step S1023, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC and updates it.

In step S1024, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is “0” or less. Here, in step S1012, when the MPU 62 determines that the winning/disapproving result is the “special out-of-match result” or after executing step S1023, the MPU 62 executes step S1024.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not "0" or less, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1015 and subsequent steps described above.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1024 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less, it determines in step S1025 whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. ..

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1025 that the winning/winning lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (when it determines that the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode), the MPU 62 executes the processes in step S1016 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1025 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 ends the special winning opening/closing process. In other words, the waiting time for ending is 0 sec as a result of the special deviation in the high probability mode.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition processing, the processing of step S915 and thereafter will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the special winning opening/closing process of step S914, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is “0” or less and the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less in step S915. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S915 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less, the game state transition processing ends.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S915 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0", the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S916. It is determined whether or not it is "0" or less.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less, it ends the game state transition processing.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S916 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, it clears the open/close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S917, and then The transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the shift processing at the end of the open/close execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1209 as shown in FIG.
In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high accuracy result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1202.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S1205 and subsequent steps.

First, the process (the process after step S1202) when the distribution result is determined by the MPU 62 to be the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high accuracy result” in step S1201 will be described.
In step S1202, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high-frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the number-of-times limitation flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode continues at least until the "big hit" is achieved in the win/loss lottery.

In step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/loss lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until the "big hit" is achieved in the winning/discarding lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

In addition, when ending the transition process at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low probability result flag, explicit small round high accuracy result flag, and most advantageous result flag) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. ), or clear the special miss flag. In addition, step S205 of the winning process for the operating mouth, step S701 of the fluctuation start process, step S806 of the display continuation time setting process, step S906 of the game state transition process, and the step of large winning port opening/closing process. In S1025, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64.

Next, the processing (processing after step S1205) in the case where the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high accuracy result” will be described.
In step S1205, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is the “low probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not the “low probability result” (when it is determined that the win/fail result is the “special out-of-match result”), the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode ends. To do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is the “low probability result”, the MPU 62 executes the processes of step S1206 and subsequent steps.

In step S1206, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the win/loss lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until a “big hit” is achieved in the win/loss lottery and the sorting result is other than the “low probability result”.

In step S1207, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the high-frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1208, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1209, the MPU 62 sets the number-of-times limitation flag in the RAM 64. The MPU 62 maintains the number-of-times limitation flag if it has already been set in the RAM 64. After that, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number set in the game number counter, are played. Continue until times are exhausted. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game times have been exhausted. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as the power combination support process in step S306 of the normal process, but a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the win/win lottery results in a “big hit” and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is “most advantageous result” or “explicit small round high-precision result”, the gaming state is the current one. After completion of the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the number-of-rounds defining mode) regardless of the game state, the high-probability mode is entered and the high-frequency support mode is entered. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue at least until the “big hit” is achieved in the winning/discarding lottery.

In addition, when the jackpot win in the win/loss lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes “low probability result”, the gaming state is the open/close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current gaming state). After the round number specification mode) is completed, the mode is switched to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a “big hit” win in the win/loss lottery, and the high-frequency support mode does not become a “big hit win” in the win/win lottery, but is low when 100 game times are exhausted. Transition to frequency support mode.

Further, when the "big hit" is not obtained in the winning/winning lottery, that is, when the winning/winning result is "special failure result" or "normal failure result" in the winning/winning lottery, the gaming state is not shifted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is advantageous for the player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball enters the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37. It functions as a game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) to the open/close execution mode.

<Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 21, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM, a RAM 94, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed, and is a volatile storage unit that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. Further, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits the command resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via connector units (connection units) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101, an MPU 102, a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 constituting the MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a program ROM 103, a work RAM 104, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip. The MPU 102, VDP 105, character ROM 106, and video RAM 107 are mounted on the display control board 101.

The MPU 102 analyzes the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process based on the command to control the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like during execution of the control program stored in the program ROM 103, and is volatile that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a storage means.

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 47. Since the VDP 105 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip having a firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads out image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 47. The character ROM 106 holds bit map format image data of various designs, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 47, and the display contents of the symbol display device 47 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 regularly executes steps S2001 to S2005 (for example, in a 2 msec cycle), as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storing process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62, the MPU 92 stores the command in the RAM 94. Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading the commands received from the MPU 62, and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 62. The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer according to the order of storage in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines an effect for game play, an effect for opening/closing execution mode, and the like. This effect determination process will be described later in detail.
In step S2003, the MPU 92 executes an effect execution process based on the content of the effect determination process of step S2002. Specifically, in the effect execution process, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, and executes voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2004, the MPU 92 executes the demo display execution process based on the demo command received from the MPU 62. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 30 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game time after the game time ends. .. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the various lamp units 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24.

In step S2005, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the effect determination processing of step S2002 to the display control device 100 is executed. In this command transmission process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not it is time to transmit the various commands stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94 as a command list to the display control device 100, and outputs the various commands to the display control device 100. If it is determined that the timing to transmit to the display control device 100 has arrived, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100.
After that, the MPU 92 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes effect determination processing in order to execute an effect for game play, an effect for opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 are received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2101 that each command has been received, in step S2102 the game result is the "most advantageous result" or "low probability" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not the result.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", in step S2103, the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result is executed. In this symbol determination processing, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “most advantageous result”, the same odd number or the same even number is finally displayed as the stop result on the activated line L. When the information relating to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the game result is the “low probability result”, the same even number is finally displayed as the stop result on the activated line L. Information concerning a combination of symbols to be possessed is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2102 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result", in step S2104, the game result is "based on the content of the type command". It is determined whether or not the result is “normally out-of-range result”.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is not the "normal out-of-range result", that is, if the game result is either the "special out-of-range result" or the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the step S2105. In, the common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a combination of special symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a "normal failure result" in the win/loss lottery (for example, "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of the special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2104 that the game result is the “normal out-of-range result”, in step S2106 it executes the symbol determination process for normal out-of-court. In this symbol removal process for normal disengagement, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display is generated based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 92 determines the information regarding the combination of the symbols of the reach display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. The combination of the symbols for reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 displays information regarding a symbol combination different from the above-described symbol combination as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the activated line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a symbol having a combination different from any of the symbol combination having the same number, the special symbol combination, and the reach symbol combination by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of the processes of step S2103, step S2105, and step S2106, the MPU 92 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S2107. In the effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the effect duration (effect duration) and the effect content as effect patterns. In addition, in step S2107, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate a notice display.

In addition, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S2108, the MPU 92 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S2103, S2105, and S2106. Then, the MPU 92 stores the variation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. These fluctuation start command and stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

From the program ROM 103, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100, based on the fluctuation start command and the stop result command transmitted from the MPU 92, causes the data display table to execute the display of the fluctuation display start and stop results on the symbol display device 47. read out. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the activated line L after starting the variable display.

After executing the process of step S2108, or when determining that the variation command and the type command have not been received in step S2101, the MPU 92 executes the processes of step S2109 and subsequent steps.
In step S2109, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the opening command is received.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2113 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2109 that the opening command is received, in step S2110 the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2111, the MPU 92 executes the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2110. In the process of determining the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2110 that the game result is the “special disengagement result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect A as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the game result is determined to be the “explicit small round high accuracy result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “low probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.
The durations of the effects A and B correspond to the times when the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed twice in the short-time mode in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the durations of the effects C and D correspond to the times when the special winning opening 38a is opened and closed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, based on the selection result of the effects A to D, the MPU 92 performs the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above.

In step S2112, the MPU 92 sets an open/close execution mode command including information related to the effect for open/close execution mode selected in step S2111. Then, the MPU 92 stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. The open/close execution mode command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 47 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

After executing the processing of step S2112, or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S2109, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2113 and subsequent steps.
In step S2113, the MPU 92 determines whether the MPU 92 has received the small hit command.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the small hit command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2113 that the small hit command has been received, the MPU 92 executes the small hit effect determination process in step S2114. In the determination processing of the small hit effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S2115, the MPU 92 sets the small hit production command relating to the small hit production determined in the small hit production determination processing of step S2114. Then, the MPU 92 stores the small hit production command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This small hit production command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads a data table for executing the small hit production on the symbol display device 47 from the program ROM 103 based on the small hit production command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the small hit effect.

After executing the processing of step S2115, or when determining that the small hit command has not been received in step S2113, the MPU 92 executes the processing of step S2116 and subsequent steps.
In step S2116, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the open/close execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game result and game status>
The relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described below.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a relationship between a game result and a game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the “normal disengagement result” and the game state and the like, in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 24, the pachinko machine 10, as a game result excluding the "normal failure result", wins and fails the "big hit prize" and the "special failure result", the "explicit small round high accuracy result", and the "most advantageous""Result", and a distribution result of "low accuracy result".

Here, as shown in the second column of the table of FIG. 24, the “special miss result” is the game result selected when the “big hit” is not achieved in the win/loss lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when the “big hit” is achieved in the win/loss lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the "normal disengagement result" and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state etc. as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state etc., the content of the game result, and The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and the special winning opening 38a is opened/closed twice in a short time mode. Further, in the "special miss result", the win/loss lottery mode does not shift.
In the low probability mode "Special Outcome Result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is Production A. In the High Probability Mode "Special Outcome Result", the stop is The result is a combination of special symbols, and a small hit effect instead of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with the upper limit number of times being two times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. It Further, in the “explicit small round high accuracy result”, the win/loss lot mode is shifted to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect B. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game time after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can recognize that the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” by confirming the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is performed in a long time mode by 15 times. Is executed once.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the opening/closing execution mode. The effect is the effect C or effect D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. In this case, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect D.
Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning/winning lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the player has a combination of symbols having the same odd number as the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is the effect C, the game result is the “most advantageous result”. Can be grasped. However, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the game result is the “most advantageous result”. It is not possible to know which is the “low probability result” and the “low probability result”. In other words, even if the "most advantageous result" is obtained in the sorting lottery, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the symbol display device 47 displays the game result. Camouflage as if "is a low accuracy result".

Then, in the game time after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 47 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 47 cancels the camouflage performed as if the game result was a “low probability result”.

<Flow after switching to high probability mode>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the right operation port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device in the case where the winning/disapproving result is the “special disengagement result” after shifting to the high-probability mode.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where a “big hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery and the result is distributed to the “explicit small round high accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery. In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In addition, in FIG. 25, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a solid line, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. Transition to variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the win/no win lottery, when the jackpot win is achieved and the distribution lottery is distributed to the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7,7,7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the win/loss lot (FIG. 25 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit the right, as shown in FIG. 25(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the side to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning in the right operating port 37 can be made higher than that in the central operating port 36.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route wins the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the shift to the winning combination open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, and enters the right operation port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 25(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is allowed to enter the right operation port 37 over a period of time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. Note that, in FIG. 25(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port of step S206 based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the right operation port closing execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Further, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. The period shifts to the fluctuation period (see FIG. 25B). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the case of the “special miss result” in the win/no win lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 25(C). As a result, a special symbol combination (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the player is allowed to play a game with the character's dialogue "Yatane!" Notify that the result is a "special failure result".

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening/closing number defining mode, opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number (twice in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S807, the special PU stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. Then, when reading out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period, as a result of the stop, a combination of special symbols ("3.4.1" in this embodiment) The time until the result of the winning/winning lottery is notified is displayed for about 0.1 sec by stopping and displaying on the activated line L.

In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907, the MPU 62 makes a small hit to the timer counter T provided in each counter area 64a of the RAM 64. "50" is set as the start waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the small hit start After a lapse of about 0.2 sec, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is set to a closed state, and when the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a freely falls, about 0.2 sec. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and can win the special winning opening 38a (Fig. 25(C)). According to this, the electric prize 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, so that the player can start the free fall of the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a. It is possible to play while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening/closing number defining mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls has won the special winning opening 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wave shape, the game ball will enter the right operation port 37 over a period of time while being shaken by this plate surface. The electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously win the remaining plurality of gaming balls that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a into the special winning opening 38a, and can easily make overwinning. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a can hold 3 to 4 game balls until the closed state is set based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. It is designed to be able to.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b. Since it will fall toward the out port 39 along the line (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win the special winning opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. The remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released. Further, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b in an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is inserted into the special winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric role product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric role product drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a into the special winning opening 38a, and when the game ball B2 enters, a predetermined game ball B2 is inserted. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the opening/closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, so that the electric accessory 37a is closed. The game ball B2 released from will fall freely toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily make the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a enter the special winning opening 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special win result" is obtained without the "big hit" in the win/loss lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state, and then the big win. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls entering the mouth 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a is a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in the present embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball will enter the right operation port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. is there.
According to this, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, Since the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 Allows more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls to enter the special winning opening 38a, which makes it easier to over-win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive unit may set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means after setting the guide piece in the open state. When the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 fluctuates when 0.1 sec has elapsed after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It suffices that the display is terminated and stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as the passage of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c may set the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing corresponding to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a. If it is, it does not need to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special win result" is obtained without the "big win" in the win/loss lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state and then the big win. The opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is the one of the game balls released from the electric accessory 37a. It is possible to hold a plurality of game balls that flow down the game area so that the number (two in the present embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. You don't have to. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a may not be formed in a wavy shape.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the electric auditors product 37a and the electric auditors product driving unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls that flow down in the game area, and assist the game balls into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b operates the electric accessory 37a. When driven, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (the open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-holding state (the closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a in the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a in the non-holding state. As a result, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b, but other mechanical elements may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central actuation port 36 and the right actuation port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

According to this embodiment as described above, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The variable winning award drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory product drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a into the special winning opening 38a, and when the game ball B2 enters, the predetermined game ball B2 is inserted. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) Since the opening/closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is released from the electric accessory 37a by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. The game ball B2 will fall freely toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a into the special winning opening 38a.
(3) The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state, and then sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, and the electric winning combination is performed. Since the object 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the electric role object 37a is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 can: More than a predetermined number of game balls can be put into the special winning opening 38a, and it is possible to easily make an over-win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting the small hitting are set. When the total time of about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state, and the vertical distance between the electric winning combination 37a and the special winning opening 38a closes the electric winning combination 37a. It was set to reach the special winning opening 38a after about 0.2 sec when the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a freely falls. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall to be able to win the special winning opening 38a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the special display duration and the small hit start When the total waiting time has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state and adjusts the waiting time for starting the small hit. In other words, in the present embodiment, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall to be able to win the special winning opening 38a. It is different from the first embodiment in that it is not limited.

FIG. 26 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operation port and the variable winning device according to the second embodiment of the present invention are enlarged.
Like the first embodiment, the right operation port 37 includes an electric accessory 37a and an electric accessory driving unit 37b, and, as shown in FIG. 26, is located on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. It is provided with a guard rail 371 provided and a passage sensor 372 provided on the right side of the guard rail 371.

The guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 with its left end abutting against the upper right end of the right operation port 37 and inclined so as to descend toward the right operation port 37. Further, the guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guard rail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half the width of the electric accessory 37a. Further, the guard rail 371 is fixed so as to project from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, for example, the game ball that has passed through the flow path of the arrow A in the figure, uses the inclination of the plate surface of the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, and the right operation port. It will flow down toward the outlet 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guard rail 371 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the guard rail 371 does not hinder the flow of the game ball flowing down along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a on the vertically upper side.

The passage sensor 372 is a sensor that detects passage of a game ball, and is provided on the game board 31 along the horizontal direction so as to be adjacent to the right end of the guardrail 371. The width of the passage sensor 372 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half the width of the electric accessory 37a. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the passage sensor 372, for example, the game ball that has passed through the flow path of the arrow B in the figure, is detected by the passage sensor 372, and then vertically above the electric accessory 37a. Side plate surface, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b, and the like will flow down. In other words, the passage sensor 372 detects the number of game balls flowing down along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a on the vertically upper side. It should be noted that the passage sensor 372 may be of any type as long as it can individually detect the passage of the game ball, and for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor or the like can be adopted.

<Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100>
FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 27, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM, a RAM 94, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed, and is a volatile storage unit that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a and various counter areas 94b.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b and the passage sensor 372. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits the command resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via connector units (connection units) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning process for the operating port, the normal process, and the game state transition process are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the winning process for the operating port, the normal process, and the game state transition process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209, which is substantially the same as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that the process of step S206A is executed instead of the process of step S206.

In step S206A, the MPU 62 executes the right operating port closing execution process. In the closing operation processing of the right operation port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball into the right operation port 37, the electric operation is performed. The accessory 37a is set in the closed state.

Here, in this embodiment, in step S206A, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory close command after setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. This electric role closing command includes information for causing the voice emission control device 90 to recognize that the electric role object 37a is set to the closed state. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the electric power combination closing command set in step S206A to the voice emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the closed state based on the electric power close command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In the normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314, which is substantially the same as in the first embodiment. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that the process of step S306A is executed instead of the process of step S306.

In step S306A, the MPU 62 executes a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37. In the electric role support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric role open lottery based on the value of the electric role open counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 64c of the RAM 64, and the electric role open lottery is executed. When winning, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. Specifically, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery, the MPU 62 controls the drive of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the open state. Then, when the MPU 62 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed without the game ball winning the right operation opening 37 after setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state, the MPU 62 drives the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The control is executed to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. Further, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory release lottery in step S306A, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the open state. After that, the power release command is set. This electric role release command includes information for causing the sound emission control device 90 to recognize that the electric role object 37a is set to the open state. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 62 transmits the electric power combination release command set in step S306A to the sound emission control device 90.
The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the electric accessory 37a has been set to the open state based on the electric power release command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S917, which is substantially the same as in the first embodiment. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that the processing of steps S907A and 908A is executed instead of the processing of steps S907 and 908.

In step S907A, the MPU 62 executes processing for setting the standby time for starting the small hit. In the setting process of the standby time for starting the small hit, the MPU 62 has a probability of 50% as the standby time (waiting period) for starting the small hit in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Is set, and with a probability of remaining 50%, "200" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec or 0.4 sec. The waiting time for starting the small hit is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Further, in the present embodiment, "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit to the timer counter T provided in each of the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 with a probability of 50%, but 50%. It is also possible to set "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 with a different probability.

In step S908A, the MPU 62 sets a small hit command. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game state transition processing. This small hitting command includes information on the game result that triggered the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and information on the waiting time for starting the small hitting. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the small hit command set in step S908A to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the open/close execution mode based on the small hit command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. This processing will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 executes a process different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing and the effect determination processing are different from those in the first embodiment. The contents of the timer interrupt process and the effect determination process in this embodiment will be described below.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device.
In the timer interruption process executed by the sound emission control device 90, the MPU 92 executes steps S2001 to S2005, which is substantially the same as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 92 executes the game ball counting process of step S2006A after executing the process of step S2001 and before executing the process of step S2002. Different from the first embodiment.

In step S2006A, the MPU 92 executes a game ball counting process. In this game ball counting process, the MPU 92 counts the number of game balls detected by the passage sensor 372 after setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. In other words, in the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 counts the number of game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a.
Hereinafter, the game ball counting process will be described in detail.

<Game ball counting process>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game ball counting process.
In the game ball counting process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2201 to S2204 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the electric power combination release command transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that it has received the electric power release command, the MPU 92 clears it by substituting 0 for the value of the passage counter PTC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S2202. To do. After that, the MPU 92 ends the game ball counting process. Here, the value of the passage counter PTC indicates the number of game balls detected by the passage sensor 372. Therefore, the MPU 92 resets and initializes the value of the passage counter PTC when the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state by the MPU 62.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the electric power release command is not received, in step S2203, the state of the passage sensor 372 is read, the state is determined, and the passage detection information is obtained. Save in RAM94. Then, based on the detection result of the passage sensor 372 stored in the RAM 94, it is determined whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected.

When the MPU 92 determines that the passage of the game ball is detected in step S2203, the MPU 92 updates the value of the passage counter PTC by adding 1 in step S2204.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2203 that the passage of the game ball has not been detected, the game ball counting process is ended.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the voice emission control device 90>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2101 to S2116, which is substantially the same as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 92 executes the processes of steps S2114A and 2115A instead of the processes of steps S2114 and 2115, and executes the process of step S2117A before executing the process of step S2113. This is different from the first embodiment in that a closing effect determination process is executed.

In step S2114A, the MPU 92 executes a small hit effect determination process. In the determination process of the small hit effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the small hit effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, when "50" is set as the standby time (waiting period) for starting the small hit in the setting processing of the waiting time for starting the small hit in step S907A, the short-term standby time effect is directed to the small hit effect. When "200" is set as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit, the long-term standby time effect is selected as the small hit effect.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S2115A, the MPU 92 sets a small hit production command including information relating to the short-term standby time effect or the long-term standby time effect selected in the small hit effect determination process of step S2114A. Then, the MPU 92 stores the small hit production command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This small hit production command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the short-term standby time effect or the long-term standby time effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit production command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes a short-term standby time effect or a long-term standby time effect.

In step S2117A, the MPU 92 executes the closing time effect determination process. In this closing time effect determination process, the MPU 92 determines the closing time effect to be executed when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Hereinafter, the closing effect determination process will be described in detail.

<Closing performance determination process>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the closing effect determination process.
In the closing effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2301 to S2306 as shown in FIG. 34.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the electric power combination closing command transmitted from the MPU 62 is received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that it has received the power combination closing command, it determines in step S2302 whether or not the value of the passage counter PTC is “3” or more.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the passage counter PTC is “3” or more, in step S2303, the MPU 92 executes the high expectation effect determination process. In the determination process of the high-expectation effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the high-expectation effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S2304, the MPU 92 sets the high-expectation effect command related to the high-expectation effect determined in the high-expectation effect determination process of step S2304. After that, the MPU 92 ends the closing effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the high expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This high expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the high expectation effect on the symbol display device 47 based on the high expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 47 executes the high-expectation degree effect.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2302 that the value of the passage counter PTC is not equal to or larger than "3" (when it is determined that the value of the passage counter PTC is less than "3"), the step S2305. In, the low expectation effect determination process is executed. In the determination process of the low-expectation degree effect, the MPU 92 selects the content of the low-expectation degree effect by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93.

Further, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the voice control of the speaker unit 24 in the effect execution process of step S2003 described above based on the content of the selected effect.

In step S2306, the MPU 92 sets the low-expectancy effect command relating to the low-expectancy effect determined in the low-expectancy effect determination process of step S2305. After that, the MPU 92 ends the closing effect determination process. Then, the MPU 92 stores the low expectation effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 94a of the RAM 94. This low expectation effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100 in the command transmission process of step S2005 described above.

The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads, from the program ROM 103, a data table for executing the low expectation effect on the symbol display device 47, based on the low expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 47 executes the low expectation effect.

<Flow after switching to high probability mode>
FIG. 35 shows that after shifting to the high-probability mode, three game balls are transmitted through the board surface of the electric accessory, and the result of winning or failing is "special disengagement result", and the waiting time for starting small hits (waiting It is a figure showing a right operation mouth, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when "50" is set as (period).
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where a “big hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery and the result is distributed to the “explicit small round high accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery. In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In addition, in FIG. 35, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. Transition to variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the win/no win lottery, when the jackpot win is achieved and the distribution lottery is distributed to the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7,7,7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the win/loss lot (FIG. 35(A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit the right, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the side to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning in the right operating port 37 can be made higher than that in the central operating port 36.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route wins the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the shift to the winning combination open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, and enters the right operation port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 35(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is allowed to enter the right operation port 37 over a period of time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. Note that in FIG. 35(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) transmitted along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port of step S206A based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing process of the right operation port, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by executing the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b, as shown in FIG. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since there are three game balls (B1, B2) traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "3".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the high-expectation degree effect determination processing of step S2303 in the closing time effect determination processing of step S2117A.
Further, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the high-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and at the same time, the character "serious attention!" to the player. It informs that the degree of expectation of winning a prize in the special winning opening 38a is high.

In addition, when the predetermined time has elapsed without the game ball winning the right operation port 37, the MPU 92 determines that the electric power combination closing command is not received in step S2301, and therefore, the closing time is set. The production (high-expectation production and low-expectation production) will not be executed.

Further, the MPU 102 starts the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby increasing the speed. The period of change is entered (see FIG. 35(B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the case of the “special miss result” in the win/no win lottery, the MPU 102 determines, as shown in FIG. 35(C), the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. As a result, a special symbol combination (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

Further, in the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 sets “50” as the standby time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, so the MPU 102 is short-term based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Execute standby time production. In the short-term standby time effect, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 and also displays the line of the character, “I did it!”. Further, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the special winning opening 38a in the open state. As a result, the short-term standby time effect informs the player that the player is highly likely to win the special winning opening 38a.

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening/closing number defining mode, opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number (twice in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S807, the special PU stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. Then, when reading out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period, as a result of the stop, a combination of special symbols ("3.4.1" in this embodiment) The time until the result of the winning/winning lottery is notified is displayed for about 0.1 sec by stopping and displaying on the activated line L.

In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907A, the MPU 62 makes a small hit to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. "50" or "200" is set as the start waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 35, since the MPU 62 sets "50" as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting the small hits. When about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is set to a closed state, and when the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a freely falls, about 0.2 sec. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, when "50" is set as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit in the MPU 62, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a are It can pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and win the special winning opening 38a (see FIG. 35C). According to this, the electric prize 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, so that the player can start the free fall of the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a. It is possible to play while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the big winning opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b. Since it will fall toward the out port 39 along the line (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win the special winning opening 38a.

FIG. 36 shows that, after shifting to the high-probability mode, two game balls are transmitted through the board surface of the electric accessory, and the winning/disapproving result becomes the “special disengagement result”, and the waiting time for starting the small hit (waiting It is a figure which shows a right operation mouth, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when "50" is set as (period).
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where a “big hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery and the result is distributed to the “explicit small round high accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery. In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 36, the open state of the right operation port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a solid line, and the closed state of the right operation port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. Transition to variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the win/no win lottery, when the jackpot is won and the distribution lottery is distributed to the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 102 determines, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. , As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7,7,7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery (FIG. 36(A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit the right, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the side to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning in the right operating port 37 can be made higher than that in the central operating port 36.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route wins the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the shift to the winning combination open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, and enters the right operation port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 36(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is allowed to enter the right operation port 37 over a period of time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. Note that, in FIG. 36(A), there are two game balls (B1, B2) that are transmitted along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port of step S206A based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing operation processing of the right operation port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 36(B). In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a passes through the electric accessory 37a and falls.

Here, as described above, since there are two game balls (B1, B2) traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "2".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the low-expectation degree effect determination process of step S2305 in the closing time effect determination process of step S2117A.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the low-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and at the same time, the character "serious!" The fact that the degree of expectation of winning the prize in the winning opening 38a is low is notified.

Further, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. The period of change is entered (see FIG. 36(B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the case of a "special failure result" in the win/no win lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. As a result, a special symbol combination (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

Further, in the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 sets “50” as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit, so the MPU 102 is short-term based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Execute standby time production. In the short-term standby time effect, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 and also displays the line of the character, “I did it!”. Further, the MPU 102 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to display an image of the special winning opening 38a in the open state. As a result, the short-term standby time effect informs the player that the player is highly likely to win the special winning opening 38a.

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening/closing number defining mode, opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number (twice in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S807, the special PU stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. Then, when reading out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period, as a result of the stop, a combination of special symbols ("3.4.1" in this embodiment) The time until the result of the winning/winning lottery is notified is displayed for about 0.1 sec by stopping and displaying on the activated line L.

In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907A, the MPU 62 makes a small hit to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. "50" or "200" is set as the start waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 36, the MPU 62 sets “50” as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit, so the standby time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting the small hits. When about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is set to a closed state, and when the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a freely falls, about 0.2 sec. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, when "50" is set as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit in the MPU 62, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is It can pass through the electric accessory 37a, fall, and win the special winning opening 38a (see FIG. 36C). According to this, the electric prize 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, so that the player can start the free fall of the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a. It is possible to play while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the big winning opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b. Since it will fall toward the out port 39 along the line (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win the special winning opening 38a.

FIG. 37 shows that, after shifting to the high-probability mode, three gaming balls are transmitted through the plate surface of the electric accessory, and the winning/disagreeing result becomes the “special disengagement result”, and the waiting time for starting the small hit (waiting It is a figure showing a right operation mouth, a variable winning device, and a symbol display device when "200" is set as a period).
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where a “big hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery and the result is distributed to the “explicit small round high accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery. In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 37, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a solid line, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. Transition to variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the win/no win lottery, when the jackpot win is achieved and the distribution lottery is distributed to the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. , As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7,7,7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the win/loss lot (FIG. 37(A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit the right, as shown in FIG. 37(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the side to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning in the right operating port 37 can be made higher than that in the central operating port 36.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route wins the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the shift to the winning combination open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, and enters the right operation port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 37(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is allowed to enter the right operation port 37 over a period of time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. Note that, in FIG. 37(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port of step S206A based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In the closing operation process of the right operation port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 37(B). In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Here, as described above, since there are three game balls (B1, B2) traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the value of the passage counter PTC is "3".
Therefore, the MPU 92 executes the high-expectation degree effect determination processing of step S2303 in the closing time effect determination processing of step S2117A.
Further, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the high-expectation effect command transmitted from the MPU 92, and at the same time, the character "serious attention!" to the player. It informs that the degree of expectation of winning a prize in the special winning opening 38a is high.

Further, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. The fluctuation period starts (see FIG. 37(B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the case of the “special miss result” in the win/no win lottery, the MPU 102, as shown in FIG. As a result, a special symbol combination (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

Further, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 sets “200” as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit, so that the MPU 102 is long-term based on the small hit effect command transmitted from the MPU 92. Execute standby time production. In the long-term standby time effect, the MPU 102 displays the character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 and also displays the line of the character "Zan-nen!". Further, the MPU 102 displays an image of the special winning opening 38a in the closed state on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. As a result, the long standby time effect informs the player that the expectation of winning in the special winning opening 38a is low.

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening/closing number defining mode, opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number (twice in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S807, the special PU stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. Then, when reading out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period, as a result of the stop, a combination of special symbols ("3.4.1" in this embodiment) The time until the result of the winning/winning lottery is notified is displayed for about 0.1 sec by stopping and displaying on the activated line L.

In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907A, the MPU 62 makes a small hit to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. "50" or "200" is set as the start waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, in FIG. 37, since the MPU 62 sets "200" as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit, the standby time for starting the small hit is 0.4 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting the small hits. When about 0.5 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is set to a closed state, and when the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a freely falls, about 0.2 sec. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, when the MPU 62 sets "200" as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit, the remaining two game balls B2 traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a are It has passed the electric accessory 37a, dropped, and cannot enter the special winning opening 38a (see FIG. 37(C)). According to this, the electric prize 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, so that the player can start the free fall of the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a. It is possible to play while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the big winning opening 38a.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a to the open state as shown in FIG. 37(D). As a result, the other game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a, falls, and can enter the special winning opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. The remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released.
Further, when "50" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit in the MPU 62, the variable winning award driving section 38c causes the game ball B2 released from the electric auditors object 37a to be the award winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b is set in an open state so as to enter the ball.
On the other hand, when "200" is set as the waiting time (waiting period) for starting the small hit in the MPU 62, the variable winning drive unit 38c increases the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a. The opening/closing door 38b is set in an open state so as not to enter the winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the first opening time to set the opening/closing door 38b to the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric winning object 37a enters the special winning opening 38a, and It is provided with a second opening timing that sets the opening/closing door 38b in an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the accessory 37a does not enter the special winning opening 38a.
According to this, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b in the open state so that the gaming ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is inserted into the special winning opening 38a, and the big winning. The opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state so that the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state so that the player does not enter the mouth 38a. It will be noted whether or not the game ball B2 entered the special winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the first opening time is after the special display duration time is set after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Although it was set when about 0.2 sec, which is the total waiting time for starting the small hit, has passed, it may be set when a time other than this has passed. In short, the first opening time may be such that the opening/closing door 38b can be set to the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a can be inserted into the special winning opening 38a.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the second opening time is after the special display duration time is set after the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Although it was set when about 0.5 sec, which is the total waiting time for starting the small hit, has been set, it may be set when another time has elapsed. In short, the second opening time is only required to set the opening/closing door 38b in the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a does not enter the special winning opening 38a.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, and then sets the open/close door 38b in the open state by the variable winning drive unit 38c (a special display). The standby time setting process (period adjusting means) of step S907A for adjusting the continuous time and the small hitting start waiting time) is provided.
According to this, the player sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, and then sets the open/close door 38b in the open state by the variable winning drive unit 38c in the relay period. Will pay attention. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the period adjusting means adjusts the relay period by selecting any one of the first opening time and the second opening time, but the time adjustment means selects three or more times. The relay period may be selected and adjusted, or a random time may be set to adjust the relay period.
Further, in the present embodiment, the period adjusting means adjusts the waiting time for starting the small hit to set the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, and then, the variable winning drive unit 38c. Although the relay period until the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state is adjusted by, for example, the display continuation time in the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 47, and the vertical direction of the electric auditors product 37a and the special winning opening 38a. The relay period may be adjusted by adjusting the distance or the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the MPU 62 sets “50” as the standby time (standby period) for starting the small hit, the variable winning drive unit 38c causes the electric accessory drive unit 37b to drive the electric accessory product. The opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state at the timing when 37a is set to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a into the special winning opening 38a, and when the game ball B2 enters, a predetermined game ball B2 is inserted. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the opening/closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, so that the electric accessory 37a is closed. The game ball B2 released from will fall freely toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily make the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a enter the special winning opening 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special win result" is obtained without the "big hit" in the win/loss lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state, and then the big win. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls entering the mouth 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a is a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in the present embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball will enter the right operation port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. is there.
According to this, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, Since the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 Allows more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls to enter the special winning opening 38a, which makes it easier to over-win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive unit may set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means after setting the guide piece in the open state. When the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 fluctuates when 0.1 sec has elapsed after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It suffices that the display is terminated and stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as the passage of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c may set the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing corresponding to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a. If it is, it does not need to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special win result" is obtained without the "big win" in the win/loss lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state and then the big win. The opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is the one of the game balls released from the electric accessory 37a. It is possible to hold a plurality of game balls that flow down the game area so that the number (two in the present embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. You don't have to. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a may not be formed in a wavy shape.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the electric auditors product 37a and the electric auditors product driving unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls that flow down in the game area, and assist the game balls into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b operates the electric accessory 37a. When driven, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (the open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-holding state (the closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a in the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a in the non-holding state. As a result, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b, but other mechanical elements may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central actuation port 36 and the right actuation port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the closing effect determination process of step S2117A executes the predetermined effect (closing effect) when the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. Functions as a time performance executing means.
According to this, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the closing time effect determination process of step S2117A, which executes a predetermined effect when the electric role object driving unit 37b sets the electric role object 37a in the closed state. For example, after setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, by executing a predetermined effect as to whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player, the player Can be notified. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the high-expectation effect, more electric balls than a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) are set by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. When there is a high degree of expectation that the player will enter the special winning opening 38a (when it is in an advantageous state for the player), it functions as an advantageous state notification effect for informing the player of the advantageous state for the player. Then, in the present embodiment, in the low-expectation-degree effect, more than a predetermined number of game balls enter the special winning opening 38a by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. If the degree of expectation is low (if the player is in a disadvantageous state), the player functions as a disadvantageous state notification effect to inform the player that the player will be in a disadvantageous state.

According to this, in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A, when the electric auditors product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric auditors product driving unit 37b, it becomes advantageous for the player. In the case where the player is in a disadvantageous state by executing a high expectation effect that notifies the player of an advantageous state and setting the electric auditors product 37a in the closed state by the electric auditors product driving unit 37b. In addition, since the low-expectation effect that informs the player that it will be in a disadvantageous state is executed, the player pays attention to the closing-time effect executed in the closing-time effect determination process of step S2117A. become.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the closing effect producing means provides information (expectation level) relating to whether or not more than a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls is to enter the special winning opening 38a. Although it has been notified to the player, it may be configured to notify the player of other information. For example, the closing time effect executing means may notify the player of information regarding whether or not the game ball can be inserted into the special winning opening 38a. In this case, the closing time effect executing means, based on information such as the number of game balls traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a, the waiting time for starting small hits, and the special display duration time, the game balls. It may be determined whether or not the player can enter the special winning opening 38a.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the same actions and effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(4) The pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b in the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a is inserted into the special winning opening 38a, and the special winning opening 38a. The opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state so as not to enter the ball. At any time of the second opening time, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the open state. It will be noted whether or not the ball B2 enters the special winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) The electric accessory driving unit 37b releases the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a by setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state and then setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. In the pachinko machine 10, however, after setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, the relay period until the opening/closing door 38b is set in the open state by the variable winning drive unit 38c (special display Since the small hitting start waiting time setting process (period adjusting means) of step S907A for adjusting the continuation time and the small hitting start waiting time) is provided, the player can operate the electric accessory driving unit. Attention will be paid to the relay period until the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state at 37b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) Since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the closing time effect determination process of step S2117A that executes a predetermined effect when the electric accessory product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, for example, After setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, the player is informed by executing a predetermined effect as to whether it is in an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state for the player. can do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The closing effect determination process in step S2117A is advantageous for the player when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, which is advantageous for the player. In the case where the player is in a disadvantageous state by executing a high-expectation effect that notifies the player that the state will be brought to a state and setting the electric auditors product 37a to the closed state by the electric auditors product driving unit 37b, Since the low-expectancy effect that informs the player that the game will be in a disadvantageous state is executed, the player pays attention to the closing time effect executed in the closing time effect determination process of step S2117A. ..
(8) In the closing effect determination process of step S2117A, by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory driving unit 37b, more than a predetermined number of game balls enter the special winning opening 38a. When the expected degree to be made is high, the high expected degree effect is executed, and the electric auditors product driving unit 37b sets the electric auditors' product 37a in the closed state, so that more than a predetermined number of game balls enter the special winning opening 38a. Since the low expectation effect is executed when the expectation to enter the ball is low, the player pays attention to the closing effect executed in the closing effect determination process of step S2117A.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operation port and the variable winning device according to the third embodiment of the present invention are enlarged.
In the first embodiment, the right operation port 37 has the electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) configured by a substantially flat plate-like movable piece having a vertically upward plate surface formed in a wave shape. Was there.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the right operation port 37B is a guide piece (support piece that is formed by a substantially flat movable piece having a vertically upward plate surface formed in a wave shape. ), and a lower electric accessory 37a2 as a guide piece (support piece) that is arranged vertically below the upper electric accessory 37a1 and that is configured by a substantially flat movable piece. It differs from the first embodiment in that it has.

In addition, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 as the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side part side, the game ball can be guided to the right operation port 37B while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The upper electric accessory 37a1 is provided so as to be inclined toward the right operation port 37B, and is connected to the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is driven by the upper electric accessory driver 37b1 to be set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). It The closed state is a state in which the upper working member 37a1 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right working port 37B, and the right working port 37B is closed. The open state is a state in which the upper working member 37a1 is advanced toward the window panel 22 and projected from the game board 31, so that the game ball is inserted into the right working port 37B and the right working port 37B is opened. Is.

The lower electric accessory 37a2 is provided so as to incline so as to descend toward the right operation port 37B, and is connected to the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2 mounted on the back side of the game board 31. .. The lower electric accessory 37a2 is driven by the lower electric accessory driver 37b2 to be in either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). Is set. The closed state is a state in which the lower working member 37a2 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 to prevent the game ball from entering the right working port 37B and close the right working port 37B. In the open state, the lower electric accessory 37a2 is moved forward toward the window panel 22 and projected from the game board 31, thereby opening the right operation port 37B so that the game ball is inserted into the right operation port 37B. It is in a state.

Here, when both the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2 are set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2 and falls. It will be.
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 on the vertically upper side, and travels along this plate surface to the right operation port 37B. You will enter the ball. At this time, since the plate surface on the upper side in the vertical direction of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball should enter the right operation port 37B slowly while being shaken by this plate surface. become.
Also, when the lower electric auditors product 37a2 is set to the open state and the upper electric auditors product 37a1 is set to the closed state, the game ball tilts the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric auditors product 37a2. Utilizing this, it will pass through this plate surface and enter the right operation port 37B. At this time, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed in a flat shape, so that the game ball immediately enters the right operation port 37B without taking time.
Therefore, the game ball cannot win in the right operation port 37B when both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are set to the closed state, and the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory When the accessory 37a2 is set in the open state, it is possible to win the right operation opening 37B.
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the open state or the closed state.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 39 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 39, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 10 executes a payout control device 70 that executes a payout control that causes the above-described payout device 71 to pay out a game ball, and a power supply that executes a discharge control that causes the above-described game ball launch mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball. And a firing control device 80, which are mounted on the backpack unit.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game (main control), and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. This substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace when it is opened, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace when it is opened. Specifically, as the trace means, a board box is configured by joining a plurality of case bodies, and a joining portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating the case bodies is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing sticker that leaves a trace that the adhesive layer has been peeled off by being left on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM 63 and a RAM 64 that configure the MPU 62. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like are combined into a chip.
In addition, in this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be configured into individual chips. This also applies to MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 60.

The MPU 62 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and the plurality of detection sensors 40a to 40f. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. In addition, the output port of the MPU 62 is an upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 that opens and closes the upper electric accessory 37a1 of the right operation port 37B, and a lower electric role that opens and closes the lower electric accessory 37a2 of the right operation port 37B. The prize driving unit 37b2, the variable winning drive unit 38c for opening and closing the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, the main display unit 45, and the accessory display unit 46 are connected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a process different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the winning process for the working opening and the normal process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the winning process and the normal process for the working opening in the present embodiment will be described.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S209, which is substantially the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that the process of step S206B is executed instead of the process of step S206.

In step S206B, the MPU 62 executes the right operating port closing execution process. In the closing operation processing of the right operation port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the upper electric auditors product driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 to perform both the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2. Set to closed state. After that, the MPU 62 executes the processing of step S207 and thereafter.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In the normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314, which is substantially the same as in the first embodiment. Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that, instead of the processing of step S306, it executes the electric power combination support processing of step S306B.

In step S306B, the MPU 62 executes the electric power support process for executing the drive control of the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2 provided in the right operation port 37B.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the electric power combination support process.
In the power combination support process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1301 to S1307 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electricity reserve area 64c of the RAM 64.

In step S1302, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the electric accessory release lottery has been won.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the electric accessory release lottery has not been won, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1307.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1302 that the electric accessory release lottery has been won, the MPU 62 executes the upper electric auditors product lottery in step S1303. In the upper electric auditors product lottery, whether or not to set the upper electric auditors product 37a1 to the open state when the electric auditors prize opening lottery is won. Specifically, in the upper electric accessory lottery, there is a 50% chance of winning, and the remaining 50% chance of not winning.
In this embodiment, in the upper electric auditors product lottery, the winning rate is 50%, but the winning rate may be different from 50%.

In step S1304, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper electric auditors product lottery has been won.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that it has won the upper electric auditors product lottery, it executes the upper electric auditors product release execution process in step S1305. In the upper electric auditors product opening execution process, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the upper electric auditors product driving unit 37b1 to set the upper electric auditors product 37a1 to the open state.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1304 that the upper electric auditors product lottery has not been won, in step S1306, the lower electric auditors product release execution processing is executed. In the lower electric auditors product opening execution processing, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 to set the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the open state.

After performing the processing of step S1305 or step S1306, and when determining in step S1302 that the electric accessory release lottery has not been won, the processing of step S1307 and subsequent steps is performed.
In step S1307, the MPU 62 executes other processing. In the other processing, the MPU 62 determines that the predetermined time has passed without setting the game ball in the right operation port 37B after setting the upper electric auditors product 37a1 or the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the open state, for example. In this case, the drive control of the upper electric auditors product driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 is executed to set both the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the closed state. Further, for example, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery. After that, the MPU 62 ends the electric power combination support process.

<Flow after switching to high probability mode>
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the right operation port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device in the case of winning the upper electric auditors product lottery after the shift to the high-probability mode, in which the winning/disapproval result is “special miss result”. is there.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where a “big hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery and the result is distributed to the “explicit small round high accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery. In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In addition, in FIG. 43, the open state of the right operation port 37B (each electric role object 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a solid line, and the right operation port 37B (each electric role object 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a chain double-dashed line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. Transition to variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the win/no win lottery, when the jackpot win is achieved and the distribution lottery is distributed to the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7,7,7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the win/loss lot (FIG. 43(A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit the right, as shown in FIG. 43(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 at the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area on the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. It is possible to increase the probability of winning in the right operating port 37B rather than the central operating port 36 by shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37B is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route wins the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the shift to the winning combination open state and the upper electric auditors product lottery in step S1303 is won, as described above, the upper electric auditors product 37a1 provided in the right operation port 37B has a predetermined value. In this manner, the open state is established.
When the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and enters the right operation port 37B along this plate surface. (See FIG. 43A). At this time, since the plate surface on the upper side in the vertical direction of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball should enter the right operation port 37B slowly while being shaken by this plate surface. become. Note that, in FIG. 43(A), there are three game balls (B1, B2) transmitted along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation processing of the right operating port of step S206B based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. In this right operation port closing execution process, as shown in FIG. 43(B), the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the upper electric auditors product driving unit 37b1 to set the upper electric auditors product 37a1 to the closed state. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery, sets the upper electric auditors product 37a1 in the open state when winning the upper electric auditors product lottery in step S1303, and then operates right. The upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the mouth 37B.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 will pass through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and fall.

In addition, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37B, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By starting the variable display of the columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the high-speed variable period starts (see FIG. 43(B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the case of the “special failure result” in the win/no win lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 43(C). As a result, a special symbol combination (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the player is allowed to play a game with the character's dialogue "Yatane!" Notify that the result is a "special failure result".

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening/closing number defining mode, opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number (twice in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S807, the special PU stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. Then, when reading out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37B, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered, and as a result of the stop, a combination of special symbols (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) The time until the result of the winning/winning lottery is notified is displayed for about 0.1 sec by stopping and displaying on the activated line L.

In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907, the MPU 62 makes a small hit to the timer counter T provided in each counter area 64a of the RAM 64. "50" is set as the start waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the upper electric accessory 37a1 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B, the total of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting the small hits. When the time of about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the upper electric prize 37a1 and the special winning opening 38a is set when the upper electric prize 37a1 is set to the closed state and the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the upper electric prize 37a1 falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a after 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 pass through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and fall to be able to win the special winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 43(C)). According to this, the electric prize 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, so that the player can start the free fall of the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a. It is possible to play while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening/closing number defining mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls has won the special winning opening 38a. However, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is allowed to enter the right working port 37B over time while being shaken by this plate surface. Therefore, the upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls by the time the game ball B1 is set in the closed state based on the ball entering the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can simultaneously win the remaining plurality of game balls that have traveled along the plate surface of the upper electric accessory 37a1 into the special winning opening 38a, and can easily make overwinning. The degree of attention to the game can be improved.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper electric accessory 37a1 holds 3 to 4 game balls until the closed state is set based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. Is designed to allow

After that, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 43(D). As a result, the other game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the upper electric accessory 37a1 and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface of the opening/closing door 38b on the vertically upper side, and this plate Since it will follow the surface and fall toward the outlet 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win the special winning opening 38a.

FIG. 44 shows the right operation port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device in the case where the result of winning/disapproving is “Special Outcome Result” after shifting to the high-probability mode, and the upper electric accessory lottery is not won. It is a figure.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where a “big hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery and the result is distributed to the “explicit small round high accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery. In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 44, the open state of the right operation port 37B (each electric auditory product 37a1, 37a2) and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a solid line, and the right operation port 37B (each electric auditory product 37a1, 37a2) is closed. The state and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a chain double-dashed line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. Transition to variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the win/no win lottery, when the jackpot win is achieved and the distribution lottery is distributed to the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7,7,7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the win/loss lot (FIG. 44(A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right hit to the player, as shown in FIG. 44(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 at the maximum, and determines the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area on the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. It is possible to increase the probability of winning in the right operating port 37B rather than the central operating port 36 by shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37B is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route wins the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the transition to the winning combination open state and the upper electric winning combination lottery in step S1303 is not won, as described above, the lower electric winning combination 37a2 provided in the right operation port 37B. Is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the lower electric auditors product 37a2 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface of the lower electric auditors product 37a2 on the upper side in the vertical direction and travels along this plate surface to the right operation port 37B. The player will enter the ball (see FIG. 44(A)). At this time, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the lower electric accessory 37a2 is formed in a flat shape, so that the game ball immediately enters the right operation port 37B without taking time. In FIG. 44(A), two game balls (B1, B2) are transmitted along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation processing of the right operating port of step S206B based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operating port 37B. In this right operation port closing execution processing, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 to set the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the closed state, as shown in FIG. 44(B). .. In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 wins the electric accessory opening lottery, and sets the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the open state when not winning the upper electric auditors product lottery in step S1303, and thereafter. , The lower electric auditors product 37a2 is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B.
Therefore, the remaining one game ball B2 that has traveled along the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2 and falls.

In addition, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37B, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By starting the variable display of the columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the high-speed variable period starts (see FIG. 44(B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the case of the "special failure result" in the win/no win lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. As a result, a special symbol combination (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the player is allowed to play a game with the character's dialogue "Yatane!" Notify that the result is a "special failure result".

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening/closing number defining mode, opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number (twice in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S807, the special PU stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. Then, when reading out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37B, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered, and as a result of the stop, a combination of special symbols (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) The time until the result of the winning/winning lottery is notified is displayed for about 0.1 sec by stopping and displaying on the activated line L.

In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907, the MPU 62 makes a small hit to the timer counter T provided in each counter area 64a of the RAM 64. "50" is set as the start waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the lower electric accessory 37a2 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B, the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting the small hitting are set. When about 0.2 sec, which is the total time, has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the lower electric prize 37a2 and the special winning opening 38a sets the lower electric prize 37a2 in a closed state, and the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the lower electric prize 37a2 falls freely. In this case, it is set to reach the special winning opening 38a after about 0.2 sec. In other words, the remaining one game ball B2, which has traveled along the plate surface of the lower electric auditors product 37a2, can pass through the lower electric auditors product 37a2 and fall to enter the special winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 44C). According to this, the electric prize 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, so that the player can start the free fall of the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a. It is possible to play while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, the opening/closing number defining mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls has won the special winning opening 38a. Since the plate surface of the lower electric accessory 37a2 on the vertically upper side is formed in a flat shape, the game ball immediately enters the right operation port 37B without spending time, and the lower side The electric accessory 37a2 is difficult to hold a plurality of game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. In other words, the lower electric accessory 37a2 is less likely to over-win than the upper electric accessory 37a1.
In the present embodiment, the lower electric auditors product 37a2 holds one or two game balls until it is set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. Is designed to be able to.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 44(D). As a result, the other game ball B fired toward the right-handed route passes through the lower electric accessory 37a2 and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface of the opening/closing door 38b on the vertically upper side, Since it will follow the plate surface and drop toward the outlet 39 (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win the special winning opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2. Then, the upper electric auditors product driving unit 37b1 sets the upper electric auditors product 37a1 to the open state, and then sets the upper electric auditors product 37a1 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. Thus, the remaining game ball B2 held by the upper electric auditors product 37a1 is released, and the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 sets the lower electric auditors product 37a2 in the open state, and then the right operation port By setting the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into 37B, the remaining game balls B2 held by the lower electric accessory 37a2 are released. The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state so that the game ball B2 released from the upper electric auditors product 37a1 is inserted into the special winning opening 38a, and is released from the lower electric auditors product 37a2. The opening/closing door 38b is set to an open state so that the game ball B2 thus entered is inserted into the special winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the upper electric auditors product drive unit 37b1 sets the upper electric auditors product 37a1 to the closed state. In addition, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the lower electric auditors product drive unit 37b2 sets the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the closed state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can enter the remaining game ball B2 held by the upper electric role object 37a1 or the lower electric role object 37a2 into the special winning opening 38a, and this game ball B2. A predetermined game ball can be paid out when the player enters the ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower electric accessory 37a2 has a plate surface on the vertically upper side thereof formed in a flat shape, and is a first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. The upper electric accessory 37a1 has a vertically upper plate surface formed in a wavy shape, can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and is larger than the lower electric accessory 37a2. It functions as a second guide piece that can hold the game ball.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric auditors product 37a1 can hold more game balls than the lower electric auditors product 37a2 by forming the plate surface on the vertically upper side in a wave shape, but for example, By forming the plate surface on the vertically upper side into a planar shape and performing a surface treatment for making the game ball less slippery, it may be possible to hold more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2. In short, the second guide piece only needs to be able to hold more game balls than the first guide piece.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper electric auditors product drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric auditors product drive unit 37b2 set the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the open state, and then insert the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B. By setting the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state based on the ball, the first open/closed state in which the remaining game balls B2 held by the lower electric accessory 37a2 are released, and the upper electric accessory. After setting 37a1 in the open state, by setting the upper electric accessory 37a1 in the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37B, the rest held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 And a second open/closed state for releasing the game ball B2.

According to this, the pachinko machine 10 has a first open/closed state in which the lower electric accessory 37a2 capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Since it can be held and is set to any one of the second open/closed states for opening/closing the upper electric accessory 37a1 capable of holding more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2, the second open/closed state is set. By setting, as compared with the case of setting in the first open/closed state, a large number of game balls can be inserted into the special winning opening 38a. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 is opened/closed, so that the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
In the present embodiment, the upper electric auditors product driving unit 37b1 sets the upper electric auditors product 37a1 to the open state or the closed state, and the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 opens the lower electric auditors product 37a2. Alternatively, although the closed state is set, the opening and closing of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set by one drive unit.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the process of step S1301 functions as a guide piece lottery means that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to set the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state. Then, the electric role supporting process of step S306B is set to either the first open/closed state or the second open/closed state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means, so that the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 function as holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the amount of holding the game ball.

According to this, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the electric hand supporting process of step S306B for adjusting the amount of holding the game ball, the pachinko machine 10 determines the amount of holding the game ball in the electric hand supporting process of step S306B. By adjusting so as to increase the number, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the special winning opening 38a. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
Further, according to this, in the electric power combination support process of step S306B, based on the lottery result of the process of step S1301, the amount of holding the game ball in the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2 is adjusted. Therefore, the player pays attention to the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means sets either the first open/closed state or the second open/closed state based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means, whereby the upper electric accessory The amount of holding the game ball was adjusted by 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means, for example, by alternately setting the first open/closed state and the second open/closed state without being based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means, the upper electric accessory 37a1 and The amount of holding the game ball may be adjusted by the lower electric accessory 37a2.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the holding amount adjusting means sets the state to either the first open/closed state or the second open/closed state, so that the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 are played. The amount of holding the sphere was adjusted. On the other hand, the holding amount adjusting means, for example, by configuring the guide piece so that the amount of holding the game ball can be changed, even if the amount of holding the game ball by the guide piece is adjusted. Good. In short, the holding amount adjusting means only needs to be able to adjust the amount of holding the game ball with the guide piece.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the opening/closing door 38b is located vertically below the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2, the upper electric auditors product driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 are provided. By setting both the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game ball B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 falls freely to open and close the door. I will head to 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily make the remaining game ball B2 held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 enter the special winning opening 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special win result" is obtained without the "big hit" in the win/loss lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state, and then the big win. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls entering the mouth 38a. Then, the upper electric auditors product 37a1 flows down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the upper electric auditors product 37a1 (two in the present embodiment) is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to hold a sphere. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 is formed in a wave shape, the game ball will enter the right working port 37B over time while being shaken by this plate surface. Is.
According to this, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, The upper electric accessory 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B2 released from the upper electric accessory 37a1 becomes larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the pachinko machine can play. The machine 10 can put more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, and can easily make an over-win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the upper electric auditors product drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric auditors product drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric auditors product 37a1 or the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the open state, and then move to the right operation port 37B. Although the upper electric auditors role 37a1 or the lower electric auditors role 37a2 has been set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1, the upper electric auditors role 37a1 or 37a1 based on the entrance of two or more game balls. The lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set in the closed state. In short, the guide piece drive unit may set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means after setting the guide piece in the open state. When setting the upper electric role object 37a1 or the lower electric role object 37a2 to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 sets the electric role object 37a to the closed state and then 0 It suffices that the variable display is terminated and the stop display is performed when 1 sec has passed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper electric auditors product drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric auditors product drive unit 37b2 set the upper electric auditors product 37a1 or the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the open state and then move to the right operation port 37B. The upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 was set to the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 of, but other conditions such as the passage of a predetermined time, for example, were satisfied. Based on the above, the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 may be set to the closed state. In this case, the variable winning prize drive unit 38c sets the upper electric auditors product 37a1 or the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the closed state by the upper electric auditors product drive unit 37b1 and the lower electric auditors product drive unit 37b2. The opening/closing door 38b may be set to the open state in accordance with the timing according to the conditions.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2. As long as it is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed the object 37a2, it may not be located vertically below the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special win result" is obtained without the "big win" in the win/loss lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state and then the big win. The opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game ball into the mouth 38a, and the upper electric auditors product 37a1 is released from the upper electric auditors product 37a1. It is possible to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of balls (two in the present embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the upper electric auditors product 37a1 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls released from the upper electric auditors product 37a1 is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It doesn't have to be. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the upper electric accessory 37a1 may not be formed in a wavy shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper electric auditors product 37a1, the lower electric auditors product 37a2, the upper electric auditors product driving unit 37b1, and the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. It also becomes possible and also functions as a ball entry assisting means for assisting the entry of game balls into the variable winning device 38. In this case, the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2 function as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the upper electric accessory drive The portion 37b1 and the lower electric auditors product driving unit 37b2 drive the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to hold them (the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2 are open). Alternatively, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that is set in a non-holding state (closed state of the upper electric accessory 37a1 and the lower electric accessory 37a2).
Then, the electric auditors product driving unit 37b sets the upper electric auditors product 37a1 or the lower electric auditors product 37a2 to the holding state to hold the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area, and the upper electric players part. By setting both the object 37a1 and the lower electric role object 37a2 in the non-holding state, the upper electric role object 37a1 or the lower electric role object 37a2 is held so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. The game ball B2 has been released.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the upper electric accessory 37a1, the lower electric accessory 37a2, the upper electric accessory drive unit 37b1, and the lower electric accessory drive unit 37b2. Mechanical elements other than this may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central actuation port 36 and the right actuation port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the same actions and effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(9) The pachinko machine 10 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and a first opened/closed state in which the lower electric auditors product 37a2 that can hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area can be held. Then, since it is set to any one of the second open/closed states for opening/closing the upper electric accessory 37a1 capable of holding more game balls than the lower electric accessory 37a2, it is set to the second open/closed state. As a result, as compared with the case where the first opening/closing state is set, a large number of game balls can be inserted into the special winning opening 38a. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the upper electric accessory 37a1 is opened/closed, so that the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

(10) The upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving unit 37b2 set the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 to the open state, and then, the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric member. By setting the accessory 37a2 to the closed state, the game ball held by the upper electric accessory 37a1 or the lower electric accessory 37a2 is released, and the pachinko machine 10 adjusts the amount of holding the game ball. Since the electric power support process of step S306B is provided, by adjusting to increase the amount of holding the game ball in the electric power support process of step S306B, the game ball enters the special winning opening 38a. It can be made easier. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.
(11) Since the electric role supporting process of step S306B adjusts the amount of holding the game ball in the upper electric auditors product 37a1 and the lower electric auditors product 37a2 based on the lottery result of the process of step S1301, The person pays attention to the lottery result of the process of step S1301. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operation port and the variable winning device according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention are enlarged.
In the first embodiment, the right operation port 37 has the electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) configured by a substantially flat plate-like movable piece having a vertically upward plate surface formed in a wave shape. Was there.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the right operation port 37C has an electric accessory 37a3 as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a substantially flat plate-like movable piece. It is different from the first embodiment in the point.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game board 31 is arranged on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 with a distance of about one game ball, and the plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wavy shape. This is different from the first embodiment in that a plate 50 constituted by a flat plate-shaped movable piece is provided.
The player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 at the maximum, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the guide rail 34 where the exit is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side portion side, the game ball can be guided to the right operation port 37C while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

The electric accessory 37a3 is provided so as to incline so as to descend toward the right operation port 37C, and is connected to the electric accessory drive unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a3 is driven by the electric accessory driver 37b to be set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). The closed state is a state in which the right operating port 37C is closed by retracting the electric accessory 37a3 toward the inside of the game board 31 so that the game ball does not enter the right operating port 37C. In the open state, the electric accessory 37a3 is advanced toward the window panel 22 and projected from the game board 31, so that the game ball is inserted into the right operation port 37C and the right operation port 37C is opened. is there.

Here, when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 37a3 and falls.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 on the vertically upper side, and enters the right operation port 37C along the plate surface. Will be done. At this time, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, so that the game ball immediately enters the right operation port 37C without taking time.
Therefore, the game ball cannot win the right operating port 37C when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state, and the right operating port 37C when the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state. Can win.

The plate 50 is provided so that the plate surface on the vertically lower side is parallel to the horizontal plane, and is connected to the plate drive unit 50a mounted on the back surface side of the game board 31. The plate 50 is driven by the plate driving unit 50a so that it vibrates in a simple manner by repeating forward and backward states. The forward state is a state in which the plate 50 is moved forward toward the window panel 22 and projected from the game board 31, thereby holding a game ball flowing down in the game area. Here, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the plate 50 is formed in a wave shape, the plate 50 can be held without dropping the game ball. The retracted state is a state in which the plate 50 is retracted toward the inside of the game board 31 so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. In the present embodiment, the period of simple vibration of the plate 50 is 2 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, the plate 50 is designed so as to be able to hold 3 to 4 game balls while being in the forward movement state.

<Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100>
FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 46, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM, a RAM 94, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information.
The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed, and is a volatile storage unit that requires external power supply to hold the stored information. Is. The RAM 94 has various areas such as a command list storage area 94a.

The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 as described above. Further, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the push button 25b. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the plate driving unit 50a that opens and closes the plate 50.
The MPU 92 executes drive control of the various lamp units 23, 49a to 49c and the speaker unit 24 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60.
Further, the MPU 92 transmits the command resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via connector units (connection units) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

<Flow after switching to high probability mode>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing the right operation port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the game ball is won in the special winning opening after the winning/disapproving result becomes the “special miss result” after shifting to the high probability mode. Is.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where a “big hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery and the result is distributed to the “explicit small round high accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery. In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 47, the open state of the right operation port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a solid line, and the closed state of the right operation port 37C and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. Transition to variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the win/no win lottery, when the jackpot win is achieved and the distribution lottery is distributed to the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. , As a result of stop, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7,7,7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/disapproval lottery (FIG. 47(A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit the right, as shown in FIG. 47(A).

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. It is possible to increase the probability of winning in the right operating port 37C rather than the central operating port 36 by shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side.
Then, when a win to the right operation port 37C is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route will be held by the plate 50 in the forward state after flowing down in the game area. FIG. 47(A) exemplifies a state in which three gaming balls are held by the plate 50.
As described above, since the plate 50 is simply vibrating, the plate 50 is in the forward movement state and then in the backward movement state. Since the plate 50 is in the retracted state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down in the game area. Therefore, the game ball held by the plate 50 falls as shown in FIG. 47(B). Will be done.

In addition, the game ball shot toward the right-handed route wins the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and wins the through gate 41. If the result of the internal lottery performed based on the above is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, as described above, the electric role object 37a3 provided in the right operation port 37C is The state becomes an open state.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 to enter the right operation port 37C along this plate surface. (See FIG. 47(B)). At this time, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, so that the game ball immediately enters the right operation port 37C without taking time. Note that, in FIG. 47(B), there are three game balls (B1, B2) that are transmitted along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3. These three game balls are game balls that have dropped from the plate 50.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation processing of the right operating port of step S206 based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. In the closing operation processing of the right operation port, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b to set the electric accessory 37a3 in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 47(C). In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right working opening 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 pass through the electric accessory 37a3 and fall.

Further, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37C, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By starting the variable display of the columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the high-speed variable period starts (see FIG. 47C). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the case of the “special failure result” in the win/no win lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. 47(D). As a result, a special symbol combination (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the player is allowed to play a game with the character's dialogue "Yatane!" Notify that the result is a "special failure result".

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening/closing number defining mode, opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number (twice in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S807, the special PU stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. Then, when reading out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37C, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered, and as a result of the stop, a combination of special symbols (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) The time until the result of the winning/winning lottery is notified is displayed for about 0.1 sec by stopping and displaying on the activated line L.

In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907, the MPU 62 makes a small hit to the timer counter T provided in each counter area 64a of the RAM 64. "50" is set as the start waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37C, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting the small hitting When about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric prize 37a3 and the special winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric ball 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a3 falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B2, which have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3, can pass through the electric accessory 37a3 and fall to win the special winning opening 38a (Fig. 47(D)). According to this, the electric prize 37a3 and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, so that after the player starts the free fall of the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a3. It is possible to play while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the big winning opening 38a.

FIG. 48 shows the right operation port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device when the game ball does not enter the special winning opening after the result of the transition to the high probability mode is the “special deviation result”. FIG.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where a “big hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery and the result is distributed to the “explicit small round high accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery. In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In addition, in FIG. 48, the open state of the right operating port 37C and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by solid lines, and the closed state of the right operating port 37C and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. Transition to variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the win/no win lottery, when the jackpot is won and the distribution lottery is distributed to the “most advantageous result”, the MPU 102 determines, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. , As a result of stop, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7,7,7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the win/loss lot (FIG. 48 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 in order to suggest a right hit to the player, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. It is possible to increase the probability of winning in the right operating port 37C rather than the central operating port 36 by shifting from the side to the side of the opposite side.
Then, when a win to the right operation port 37C is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route will be held by the plate 50 in the forward state after flowing down in the game area. FIG. 48(A) exemplifies a state in which one gaming ball is held by the plate 50.
As described above, since the plate 50 is simply vibrating, the plate 50 is in the forward movement state and then in the backward movement state. Since the plate 50 is in the retracted state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area, so that the game ball held by the plate 50 falls as shown in FIG. 48(B). Will be done.

In addition, the game ball shot toward the right-handed route wins the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31 before being held by the plate 50, and wins the through gate 41. If the result of the internal lottery performed based on the above is the result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, as described above, the electric role object 37a3 provided in the right operation port 37C is The state becomes an open state.
When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 to enter the right operation port 37C along this plate surface. (See FIG. 48B). At this time, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a3 is formed in a flat shape, so that the game ball immediately enters the right operation port 37C without taking time. Note that, in FIG. 48(B), the number of game balls traveling along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a3 is one (B1). This one game ball B1 is a game ball dropped from the plate 50.

In the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing operation process of the right operating port in step S206 based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operating port 37C. In the closing operation process of the right operation port, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the closed state by executing the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 37b, as shown in FIG. 48(C). In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a3 to the open state when winning the electric accessory opening lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right working opening 37C. The electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state.

Further, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37C, the MPU 102, based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, a plurality of symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47. By starting the variable display of the columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4), the high-speed variable period starts (see FIG. 48(C)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the case of the “special failure result” in the win/no win lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the high speed fluctuation period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 48(D). As a result, a special symbol combination (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the player is allowed to play a game with the character's dialogue "Yatane!" Notify that the result is a "special failure result".

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening/closing number defining mode, opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number (twice in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S807, the special PU stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. Then, when reading out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37C, the high-speed fluctuation period is entered, and as a result of the stop, a combination of special symbols (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) The time until the result of the winning/winning lottery is notified is displayed for about 0.1 sec by stopping and displaying on the activated line L.

In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907, the MPU 62 makes a small hit to the timer counter T provided in each counter area 64a of the RAM 64. "50" is set as the start waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37C, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for starting the small hitting When about 0.2 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state.

In addition, the vertical distance between the electric prize 37a3 and the special winning opening 38a is about 0.2 sec when the electric ball 37a3 is set to the closed state and the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a3 falls freely. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining game balls that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric winning combination 37a3 can pass through the electric winning combination 37a3 and fall to win the special winning opening 38a. According to this, the electric prize 37a3 and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, so that after the player starts the free fall of the game ball that has been traveling along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a3. It is possible to play while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the big winning opening 38a. However, in the example of FIG. 47, since there is no game ball that has passed through the electric auditors object 37a3 and dropped, the game ball cannot be won in the special winning opening 38a (see FIG. 48(D)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a3. Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37C. The remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 is released. Further, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to an open state so that the game ball B2 released from the electric accessory 37a3 is inserted into the special winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric accessory product 37a3 is set to the closed state by the electric accessory product drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 into the special winning opening 38a, and when the game ball B2 is entered, a predetermined game ball is entered. Can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the opening/closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a3, the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. The game ball B2 released from will fall freely toward the opening/closing door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily insert the remaining game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 into the special winning opening 38a.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37C. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive unit may set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means after setting the guide piece in the open state. When the electric accessory 37a3 is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 changes when 0.1 sec has elapsed after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It suffices that the display is terminated and stopped.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a3 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37C. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a3 may be set to the closed state on the basis of satisfying other conditions such as elapse of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at a timing corresponding to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a3 to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a3, but is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a3. If it exists, it does not need to be located on the vertically lower side of the electric accessory 37a3.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the electric auditors product 37a3 and the electric auditors product driving unit 37b are capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area, and assist the entrance of the game balls into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a3 functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b operates the electric accessory 37a3. When driven, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (the electric accessory 37a3 in the open state) or the non-holding state (the electric accessory 37a3 in the closed state).
Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the holding state to hold the plurality of game balls B1 and B2 flowing down the game area, and sets the electric accessory 37a3 in the non-holding state. As a result, the game ball B2 held by the electric accessory 37a3 is released so as not to interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the ball entry assist means employs the electric accessory 37a3 and the electric accessory drive unit 37b, but other mechanical elements may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central actuation port 36 and the right actuation port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a function as a holding unit that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area. Specifically, the plate 50 functions as a holding main body portion located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3, and the plate driving portion 50a drives the plate 50, It functions as a holding drive unit that sets the holding state or the non-holding state. Then, the plate drive unit 50a holds a plurality of game balls that flow down the game area by setting the plate 50 in the holding state, and sets the plate 50 in the non-holding state, thereby flowing down the game area. The game ball held by the plate 50 is released so as not to interfere with the ball.
According to this, the plate 50 and the plate drive unit 50a can surely hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area in the electric accessory 37a3.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the plate driving unit 50a is configured to drive the plate 50 so as to repeat the holding state and the non-holding state so as to perform single vibration. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can simplify the configurations of the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a.

In the present embodiment, the plate 50 is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3, but the flow path of the game ball held by the electric accessory 37a3 is located. It may not be located on the upstream side. In short, the variable winning device may be provided with an opening/closing door located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the holding main body.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special win result" is obtained without the "big hit" in the win/loss lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state, and then the big win. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls entering the mouth 38a. And the plate 50 has a plurality of game balls released from the plate 50 (the number of game balls excluding the game balls entering the right operation port 37C) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, and a plurality of flow-down areas are provided. It is possible to hold a game ball. The plate 50 is provided so that the plate surface on the vertically lower side is parallel to the horizontal plane, and the plate surface on the vertically upper side is formed in a wave shape, so that the game ball is on this plate surface. This is because they will be held without falling.
According to this, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a after setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, Since the plate 50 can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 has a big winning opening. It is possible to make it easier to enter more than a predetermined number of game balls into 38a, and it is possible to easily make an over-win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the present embodiment as described above, it is possible to obtain substantially the same action and effect as (1) and (2) in the first embodiment, as well as the following actions and effects.
(12) The plate drive unit 50a holds a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the plate 50 in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the plate 50 in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the plate 50 is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the plate 50 and the plate drive unit 50a can surely hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area in the electric accessory 37a3.

(13) Since the plate driving unit 50a is set to drive the plate 50 so that the holding state and the non-holding state are repeated so as to perform a single vibration, the pachinko machine 10 includes the plate 50 and the plate driving unit 50a. The configuration can be simplified.
(14) The variable winning drive unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, and the plate 50. Since it is possible to hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the plate 50 is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a special winning opening 38a. It is possible to make it easier to enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls, and it is easy to make over-win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the parts that have already been described are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, all the remaining game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall to be able to win the special winning opening 38a. ..
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all the remaining game balls B2 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall to be able to win the special winning opening 38a. It is different from the first embodiment in that it is not limited.

FIG. 49 is a front view of the game board in which the vicinity of the right operation port and the variable winning device according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention are enlarged.
As in the first embodiment, the right operation port 37 includes an electric accessory 37a and an electric accessory drive unit 37b, and as shown in FIG. It is provided with a guard rail 371 provided and a general winning opening 35D provided vertically below the electric accessory 37a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the right operation port 37 and the electric accessory 37a are provided at positions offset vertically upward as compared with the first embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the cover 381 is formed in a shape that matches the offset of the right operation port 37 and the electric accessory 37a.

The guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 with its left end abutting against the upper right end of the right operation port 37 and inclined so as to descend toward the right operation port 37. Further, the guard rail 371 is provided on the game board 31 so as to be parallel to the electric accessory 37a. The width of the guard rail 371 in the horizontal direction is set to be about half the width of the electric accessory 37a. Further, the guard rail 371 is fixed so as to project from the game board 31 toward the window panel 22. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down from the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, for example, the game ball that has passed through the flow path of the arrow A in the figure, uses the inclination of the plate surface of the vertically upper side of the guardrail 371, and the right operation port. It will flow down toward the outlet 39 (see FIG. 2) without entering the ball 37. Further, a game ball flowing down from the right side of the guardrail 371, for example, a game ball passing through the flow path of the arrow B in the drawing, is a plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a or a vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b. It will flow down along the board surface. Here, the distance between the electric accessory 37a and the guard rail 371 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the guard rail 371 does not hinder the flow of the game ball flowing down along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a on the vertically upper side.

The general winning opening 35D is provided on the game board 31 so as to be positioned vertically below the guardrail 371. In other words, the general winning opening 35D reaches the position just below the guard rail 371 (the left half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) among the game balls flowing down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a. The game ball is provided at a position for entering the ball by setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. In addition, among the game balls that flow down along the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, the game ball that reaches the right half of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state. As a result, it will fall toward the open/close door 38b of the special winning opening 38a while avoiding the general winning opening 35D.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of 10 prize balls when a ball has entered the general winning port 35, and a ball has entered the variable winning device 38. In this case, the payout of 15 prize balls was executed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning openings 35 and 35D, and enters the variable winning device 38. In the case of occurrence of, the payout of 10 prize balls is executed, which is different from the first embodiment.

<Flow after switching to high probability mode>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the right operation port, the variable winning device, and the symbol display device in the case where the winning/disapproving result is the “special disengagement result” after shifting to the high-probability mode.
The high-probability mode shifts to a case where a “big hit” is selected in the win/loss lottery and the result is distributed to the “explicit small round high accuracy result” or the “most advantageous result” in the distribution lottery. In this case, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in FIG. 50, the open state of the right operating port 37 and the closed state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a solid line, and the closed state of the right operating port 37 and the open state of the variable winning device 38 are shown by a two-dot chain line.

First, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. Transition to variable period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the win/no win lottery, when the jackpot is won and the distribution lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the MPU 102 is based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92 after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period. As a stop result, a combination of symbols having the same number (“7,7,7” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the win/loss lot (FIG. 50 (A )reference). After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number defining mode in which a round game is played with 15 times as the upper limit number of times, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode.
After the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the winning/winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 102 displays a rightward arrow on the upper right of the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 to suggest the player to hit the right, as shown in FIG.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, the player hits the right with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being the maximum, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed. By shifting from the side of the side to the side of the opposite side, the probability of winning in the right operating port 37 can be made higher than that in the central operating port 36.
Then, when the winning to the right operation port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can advantageously proceed with the game by launching the game ball toward the right-handed route.

The game ball shot toward the right-handed route wins the through gate 41 provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 31, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 41 is electric. When the result corresponds to the shift to the winning combination open state, as described above, the electric accessory 37a provided in the right operation port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.
When the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the game ball uses the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a, and enters the right operation port 37 along this plate surface. (See FIG. 50(A)). At this time, since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball is allowed to enter the right operation port 37 over a period of time while being shaken by this plate surface. Become. In addition, in FIG. 50(A), the number of game balls transmitted along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is three (B1, B21, B22).

In the high probability mode, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process of the right operating port of step S206 based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operating port 37. In this right operation port closing execution processing, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric auditors product driving unit 37b to set the electric auditors product 37a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 50(B). In other words, in the high-probability mode, the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state when winning the electric accessory open lottery, and then, based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right working opening 37. The electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state.
Therefore, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall.

Further, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 92, thereby high speed. The variable period starts (see FIG. 50(B)). In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 102 starts variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, in the case of a “special failure result” in the win/no win lottery, the MPU 102, based on the stop result command received from the MPU 92, after the lapse of the high speed fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. As a result, a special symbol combination (“3.4.1” in the present embodiment) is stopped and displayed on the activated line L to notify the result of the winning/winning lottery. After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open/close execution mode.
In addition, the MPU 102 displays a character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 47 based on the small hit production command transmitted from the MPU 92, and the player is allowed to play a game with the character's dialogue "Yatane!" Notify that the result is a "special failure result".

In the "special disengagement result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In this opening/closing number defining mode, opening/closing of the special winning opening 38a has been performed a predetermined total number (twice in the present embodiment), or a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls. Ends on the condition that the player has won the special winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S807, the special PU stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is stored. Read the display duration. Then, when reading out the special display duration time, the MPU 62 sets the special display duration time (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) in the display duration time counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64. Therefore, based on the entry of one gaming ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period, as a result of the stop, a combination of special symbols ("3.4.1" in this embodiment) The time until the result of the winning/winning lottery is notified is displayed for about 0.1 sec by stopping and displaying on the activated line L.

In addition, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the winning/winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, in step S907, the MPU 62 makes a small hit to the timer counter T provided in each counter area 64a of the RAM 64. "50" is set as the start waiting time (waiting period). The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for starting the small hit is 0.1 sec.

In other words, after setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the MPU 62 based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37, the total time of the special display continuation time and the waiting time for the small hit start After a lapse of about 0.2 sec, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the open state.

Further, the vertical distance between the electric accessory 37a and the special winning opening 38a is set to a closed state, and when the game ball that has traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a freely falls, about 0.2 sec. It is set so as to reach the special winning opening 38a later. In other words, the remaining two game balls B21 and B22 that have traveled along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a pass through the electric accessory 37a and fall to be able to win the special winning opening 38a. (See FIG. 50C). According to this, the electric prize 37a and the special winning opening 38a are separated from each other by a predetermined distance, so that the player can start the free fall of the game ball traveling along the plate surface of the electric prize 37a. It is possible to play while enjoying the process of reaching the special winning opening 38a and whether or not to win the big winning opening 38a.

Here, as described above, among the game balls B21 and B22 flowing down along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a on the vertically upper side, the game ball B21 that reaches the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is By setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state, the player will enter the general winning opening 35D. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of 15 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning openings 35 and 35D.
On the other hand, among the game balls B21 and B22 that flow down along the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a in the vertically upper side, the game ball B22 that reaches the right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a is the electric object. By setting 37a in the closed state, the player can enter the large winning opening 38a while avoiding the general winning opening 35D. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes payout of ten prize balls when a ball has entered the variable winning device 38.

After that, the MPU 62 sets the special winning opening 38a in the closed state, as shown in FIG. As a result, the other game ball B launched toward the right-handed route passes through the electric accessory 37a and, after falling, utilizes the inclination of the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 38b. Since it will fall toward the out port 39 along the line (see FIG. 2), it will not be possible to win the special winning opening 38a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a. Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state, and then sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. The remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released. In addition, the variable winning award driving unit 38c sets the opening/closing door 38b to an open state so that the game balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a are inserted into the special winning opening 38a.

In other words, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing when the electric role product 37a is set to the closed state by the electric role product drive unit 37b. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can insert the remaining game balls B21, B22 held by the electric accessory 37a into the special winning opening 38a. At the time of entering the game balls B21, B22. A predetermined game ball can be paid out. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the opening/closing door 38b is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, so that the electric accessory 37a is closed. The game balls B21 and B22 released from the free fall to the open/close door 38b. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can easily insert the remaining game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a into the special winning opening 38a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special win result" is obtained without the "big hit" in the win/loss lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state, and then the big win. The opening/closing door 38b is set to a closed state based on a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of game balls entering the mouth 38a. Then, the electric accessory 37a is a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a (two in the present embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. It can be held. Since the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a is formed in a wavy shape, the game ball will enter the right operation port 37 over time while being shaken by this plate surface. is there.
According to this, the variable winning award drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state, and then sets the open/close door 38b to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, The electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of the game balls B21 and B22 released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls, so that the pachinko machine can play. The machine 10 can insert more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, and can easily make an over-win. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can improve the player's attention to the game.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls. In short, the guide piece drive unit may set the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means after setting the guide piece in the open state. When the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state based on the entry of two or more game balls, the MPU 62 fluctuates when 0.1 sec has elapsed after setting the electric accessory 37a to the closed state. It suffices that the display is terminated and stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory driving unit 37b sets the electric accessory 37a in the open state, and then closes the electric accessory 37a based on the entry of the game ball B1 into the right operation port 37. Although it has been set, the electric accessory 37a may be set to the closed state based on the satisfaction of other conditions such as the passage of a predetermined time. In this case, the variable winning drive unit 38c may set the open/close door 38b to the open state at the timing corresponding to other conditions for setting the electric accessory 37a in the closed state by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38 is located vertically below the electric accessory 37a, but is located downstream of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the electric accessory 37a. If it is, it does not need to be positioned vertically below the electric accessory 37a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the "special win result" is obtained without the "big win" in the win/loss lottery, the variable winning drive unit 38c sets the open/close door 38b to the open state and then the big win. The opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number (one in the present embodiment) of the game balls into the mouth 38a, and the electric accessory 37a is the one of the game balls released from the electric accessory 37a. It is possible to hold a plurality of game balls that flow down the game area so that the number (two in the present embodiment) is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. On the other hand, the electric accessory 37a can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the electric accessory 37a is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. You don't have to. In other words, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the electric accessory 37a may not be formed in a wavy shape.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the electric auditors product 37a and the electric auditors product driving unit 37b can hold a plurality of game balls that flow down in the game area, and assist the game balls into the variable winning device 38. It also functions as an auxiliary means. In this case, the electric accessory 37a functions as an auxiliary main body located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device 38, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b operates the electric accessory 37a. When driven, it functions as an auxiliary drive unit that sets the holding state (the open state of the electric accessory 37a) or the non-holding state (the closed state of the electric accessory 37a).
Then, the electric accessory driving unit 37b holds the plurality of game balls B1, B21, B22 flowing down the game area by setting the electric accessory 37a in the holding state, and sets the electric accessory 37a in the non-holding state. By setting, the game balls B21 and B22 held by the electric accessory 37a are released so as not to interfere with the game balls flowing down the game area.

In the present embodiment, the ball entry assisting means employs the electric accessory 37a and the electric accessory driving unit 37b, but other mechanical elements may be adopted. In other words, the ball entry assist means may be configured independently of the starting ball entry means (the central actuation port 36 and the right actuation port 37). In short, the auxiliary main body may be capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 37a has an advantageous side holding position (of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous for the player when the remaining electric game balls are released by the electric accessory drive unit 37b. When the remaining game balls are released by the left half of the plate surface) and the electric accessory driving unit 37b, a disadvantageous side holding position (electrical electric object 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position The right half surface of the plate surface). Specifically, the advantageous side holding position is advantageous for the player by causing a predetermined number (15 in the present embodiment) of the game balls to enter the general winning opening 35D for paying out the game balls. Guided to the path, the disadvantageous side holding position is entered into the special winning opening 38a for paying out a smaller number (10 in the present embodiment) of the game balls when entering the game balls, It is designed to lead a route that is disadvantageous to the player.

According to this, the electric accessory 37a has an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path advantageous to the player when the remaining game balls are released by the electric accessory drive unit 37b, and the electric accessory drive unit 37b. At the time of releasing the remaining game balls, it has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the position of the remaining game ball when releasing the remaining game ball with the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the pachinko machine 10 determines the degree of attention of the player to the game. Can be improved.

Further, the advantageous side holding position leads to a path advantageous to the player by causing the general winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls at the time of entering the game ball, and the disadvantage side holding position is the game. When entering a ball, the player wins a number of game balls less than a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening 38a, which leads to a path that is disadvantageous to the player. When releasing the remaining game balls in the portion 37b, the position of the game balls will be further noted.
In other words, the electric accessory 37a, when releasing the remaining game balls in the electric accessory drive unit 37b, the advantageous side holding position that leads to the path for entering the general winning opening 35D different from the special winning opening 38a. Since it has, the pachinko machine 10 puts the game ball at the advantageous side holding position among the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a into the general winning opening 35D different from the special winning opening 38a. It is possible to make a ball, and when entering this game ball, it is possible to pay out more game balls than a predetermined number of game balls. Therefore, the player pays more attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the remaining game ball with the electric accessory driving unit 37b.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the advantageous side holding position is led to a path that is advantageous to the player by entering the general winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when entering the game ball, and the disadvantage side The holding position leads to a path that is disadvantageous to the player by allowing the player to enter a large winning opening 38a that pays out a smaller number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls when entering the game balls. In other words, the advantageous-side holding position and the disadvantageous-side holding position have created a route that is advantageous and a route that is disadvantageous for the player by changing the number of game balls to be paid out.

On the other hand, for example, the advantageous side holding position may be guided to a route that is advantageous to the player by entering the V winning opening that triggers the opening and closing execution mode when entering the game ball. .. In short, the advantageous side holding position may be a position that can guide the player to a path that is advantageous to the player when the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece drive unit, and the disadvantageous side holding position is the guide piece. When the remaining game balls are released by the drive unit, it may be located at a position where it can be guided to a path that is disadvantageous to the player.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the same actions and effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(15) The electric accessory 37a has an advantageous side holding position that guides the player to a path advantageous to the player when the remaining electric game balls are released by the electric accessory driver 37b, and the electric accessory driver 37b. When releasing the remaining game balls, it has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, the player pays attention to the position of the remaining game ball when releasing the remaining game ball with the electric accessory drive unit 37b, so that the pachinko machine 10 has a degree of attention to the game of the player. Can be improved.
(16) The advantageous side holding position is led to a path that is advantageous to the player by entering the general winning opening 35D that pays out a predetermined number of game balls when entering the game ball, and the disadvantage side holding position is When entering a game ball, the player is guided to a path that is disadvantageous to the player by allowing the player to enter a large winning opening 38a that pays out a smaller number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls. When the remaining game balls are released by the drive unit 37b, the position of the game balls will be further noted.

(17) The electric accessory 37a has an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path for entering the general winning opening 35D different from the special winning opening 38a when releasing the remaining game balls by the electric accessory driving unit 37b. Since it has, the pachinko machine 10 enters the game ball at the advantageous holding position among the remaining game balls held by the electric accessory 37a into the general winning opening 35D different from the special winning opening 38a. More than a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out at the time of entering this game ball. Therefore, the player further pays attention to the position of the game ball when the remaining game ball is released by the electric accessory driving unit 37b.

[Modifications of Embodiments]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, etc. within a range in which the object of the present invention can be achieved are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may execute opening and closing of the special winning opening 38a a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapse after the open/close door 38b is set to the open state, or a game to the special winning opening 38a. When the total winning number of balls reaches the predetermined upper limit number, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may be changed according to the upper limit duration time, and the condition for setting the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 38b to the open state, and then the total winning number of game balls to the special winning opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit number of eight. As a result, the opening/closing door 38b is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with different upper limit numbers depending on the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be set with different upper limit numbers for each round in one open/close execution mode.

(4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is opened and closed by setting the opening/closing door 38b to the open state and then reaching the predetermined upper limit number of the total winning numbers of game balls into the special winning opening 38a. The door 38b was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an end trigger opening that sets the opening/closing door 38b to the closed state when the game ball enters, and when the predetermined time elapses, this end It may be configured to allow a ball to enter the opportunity opening.
(5) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open/close door 38b to the open state, and then the open/close door 38b is closed again after the predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. Was set to. On the other hand, for example, in the pachinko machine 10, after the open/close door 38b is set to the open state, the open/close door 38b is opened by a predetermined time period from when the winning at the special winning opening 38a occurs. The closed state may be set again.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open/close door 38b in the open state and then sets the open/close door 38b in the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may shift to the next round game without setting the open/close door 38b again after setting the open/close door 38b in the open state.
(7) In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the game cycle of the game ball, and is n times (n=1, 2, or 3) less than the game cycle of the game ball. The time may be set.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening/closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an open/close execution mode in which a round game is executed twice with an upper limit duration of a short time mode, and an open/close execution mode in which a round game is executed 15 times with an upper limit duration of a long time mode. Had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening/closing execution mode different from the above regarding the mode of the upper limit duration time and the number of times the round game is executed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 changes the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 38b such as half-open or full-open by changing the mode of the upper limit duration, instead of the configuration of setting a plurality of types of opening/closing execution modes. The configuration may be such that a plurality of types of open/close execution modes are set. Furthermore, the aspect of the upper limit duration may be set so that the player sees the same aspect, but the exact upper limit duration is different.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance so as to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be randomly selected and set from a plurality of kinds of effects without being associated with the game result, and selected by a lottery or the like from the plurality of kinds of effects. The selection rate may be set differently depending on the game result.

(10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 92 finally stops and displays on the activated line L when the game result is one of the “special miss result” and the “explicit small round high accuracy result”. As a result, information relating to a special symbol combination is determined, and this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result, and make it difficult for the player to know which game result.

(11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 in the lottery for the jackpot occurrence, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 in the lottery for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs. On the other hand, when the big hit occurs, the MPU 62 may use the big hit random number counter C1 for the lottery of the kind of the big hit. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a “special deviation result” and a “normal deviation result”, and the MPU 62 stores the value of the random number that wins the jackpot. The jackpot occurrence lottery is executed by comparing the hit/miss table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. In other words, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery related to the “special miss result”. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the “special out-of-match result”, and thus the “special out-of-match” is generated. A lottery relating to “result” may be executed.

(13) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for jackpot occurrence, the value of the random number that is the “special miss result” is 2, and the jackpot occurrence In the gaming state where the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that is the “special miss result” was 551. In other words, the probability of being a “special failure result” was set to be higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of "extra outlier" may be set to be lower in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, and set to be the same in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. It may have been done. In addition, the probability of being a “special deviation result” may be set to 0 in at least one of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by setting the win/loss lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous gaming state may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous gaming state by changing the number of game times for continuing the high-probability mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. ..

(15) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the hold information related to the central working opening 36 in the first result display holding area Ra, and the hold information related to the right working opening 37 to the second result display portion. By storing in the storage area Rb for use, the hold information related to the central operation port 36 and the hold information related to the right operation port 37 are stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store the hold information related to the central operation port 36 and the hold information related to the right operation port 37 together.
(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the right operation port 37 for playing the game times regardless of whether or not there is the hold information related to the central operation port 36. .. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the central operation port 36 and the hold information related to the right operation port 37 for the game times to be consumed in the winning order of the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command resulting from analysis of the command to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 is controlled by the following. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits the command resulting from the analysis of the command to the voice emission control device 90, thereby performing the voice emission control. Control of the device 90 may be performed. The command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in each of the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. ..
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one control device of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 60.

(19) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 causes the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to be periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of the symbols, the effect for playing the game is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect for playing the game is not limited to the effect described in each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for game play by operating a movable decorative member provided on the game board 31 in combination with the symbol display device 47. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game use by operating the light emitting means provided on the game board 31 and the symbol display device 47 in combination. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect for game play by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 47.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (win or lose lottery and distribution lottery) based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37, and then the main display unit 45. And the symbol display device 47 executes the variable display, and as the stop result of the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the central operating opening 36 or the right operating opening 37 is displayed. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 47 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after the variable display is started. The result of may be displayed. In this case, after the variable display is started and before the variable display is stopped, the internal lottery may be executed and the stop result and the like may be set.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 executes the variable display of the picture and displays the result of the internal lottery as the stop result of the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the result of the internal lottery, or by displaying the stop result at random, The result of the lottery may not be identified. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may not include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 47 periodically scrolls the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the central operating port 36 or the right operating port 37. Then, by starting the variable display of the symbols, the effect for playing the game is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 47 may execute the game use effect on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (a symbol) that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 47 has a predetermined region in at least one of a region narrower than a region for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral region of the region for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, a symbol clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols to be displayed in this predetermined area may or may not be variably displayed during variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Here, the pattern displayed in the predetermined area may be a character, a color, or a pattern that is difficult for the player to identify, or a combination thereof. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify by adopting characters or colors or patterns that are difficult for the player to identify, and patterns that are similar to each other, or combinations thereof, even if they are not. According to this, the manager of the game hall, for example, looks at the symbol display device 47 without looking at the main display portion 45 at the end of the game time, and is the same as in the case of winning the lottery. It is possible to simply confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior is being performed.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate independently, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. .. For example, the game machine is configured so that the player can output an optical code by operating a button or the like provided on the game machine, and the information of the optical code is provided on a camera provided on a mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured so that the information of the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by capturing and reading the image at, and accessing the website. In addition, the game machine is configured to receive the information of the web server by inputting the password issued by the player accessing the website to the game machine by operating the buttons etc. provided on the game machine. You may.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10, for example, the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens the electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the game machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine or another type of game machine such as a sparrow ball.

[Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment]
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments will be described below. In addition, among the features of the present invention group, the corresponding configurations in the respective embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the respective embodiments, and the features of the present invention group Modifications, improvements, etc. within a range where the object can be achieved, and combinations of the respective features are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Feature A group>
Features A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the lottery means to be executed (right actuation port 37) and the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the lottery means, a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is established. A game provided with a game state transition means (main control device 60) for transitioning the game state, and a variable winning device (variable winning device 38) for transitioning to a state in which a game ball can enter when transitioning to the specific control state. Machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means,
A guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means (electric Accessory 37a, 37a3, upper electric accessory 37a1, and lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (electrical accessory driving unit 37b, upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1, and lower electric auditor product driving unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece. ,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow path of a game ball that has passed through the guide piece and has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted into the special winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the guide piece. Release the remaining game balls held in,
The variable winning drive unit,
A game machine characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece is inserted into the special winning opening.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means after setting the guide piece in the open state. By doing so, the remaining game ball held by the guide piece is released, and the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening. To do. In other words, the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. According to this, the gaming machine can insert the remaining game balls held by the guide piece into the special winning opening, and can pay out a predetermined game ball when entering the game balls. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, since the opening and closing door is located vertically below the guide piece, the game piece released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall freely toward the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can easily make the remaining gaming balls held by the guide piece enter the special winning opening.

Features A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 or the feature A2 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open/close door in the open state, the open/close door is set in the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the open state, and then sets the open/close door to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the gaming machine has a big winning opening. More game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be entered, and over-winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening time that sets the opening and closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening,
A second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece is not inserted into the special winning opening,
The gaming machine sets the opening/closing door to an open state at any one of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has the first opening machine that sets the opening/closing door to the open state so that the gaming ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening, and the special winning opening. The open/close door is set to the open state so that the player does not enter the ball. The open/close door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening times, so that the player can win the game ball released from the guide piece. We will pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A4 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
And a second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive section (the upper electric accessory driving section 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2) is
After setting the first guide piece in the open state, the first guide piece is set in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the first guide piece in the closed state. A first open/closed state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide piece are released,
After setting the second guide piece in the open state, the second guide piece is set in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the second guide piece in the closed state. With a second open/closed state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide piece,
The gaming machine is set to any one of the first open/closed state and the second open/closed state.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first open/closed state in which a first guide piece that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and a plurality of game machines flowing down the game area. Since the game ball can be held and the second guide piece that can hold more game balls than the first guide piece is set to either the second open/closed state or the second open/closed state, the second open/close By setting the state, as compared with the case of setting the first open/closed state, it is possible to insert a large number of game balls into the special winning opening. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A5 of the present invention group,
A holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means is
A holding body portion (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece,
A holding drive unit (a plate drive unit 50a) for setting the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit,
The holding drive unit,
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing the game ball held by the holding body in this manner.

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the holding body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body section in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body section in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Features A7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising a closing time effect executing means (a closing time effect determination process of step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, since the gaming machine is provided with the closing time effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, for example, After setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, it is possible to notify the player of whether it is in the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state for the player by executing a predetermined effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features A1 to A7 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
An advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous for the player when releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece drive unit,
When releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece drive portion, a disadvantageous side holding position (right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position, A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide piece are released. In addition, the guide piece releases the remaining game ball by the guide piece drive part, and an advantageous side holding position that guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player when the guide piece drive part releases the remaining game ball. In this case, it has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the position of the remaining game ball when releasing the remaining game ball with the guide piece drive unit, the gaming machine improves the player's attention to the game. be able to.

According to the feature group A of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is provided with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball enters the actuation opening (starting ball entering means), whereby an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

However, since the variable prize winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area is entered, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. There is a problem of doing.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when the game ball is entered. It is advantageous for the player based on the starting ball entering means (the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entering means. A game state transition means (main control device 60) for transitioning the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and a variable winning device for transitioning to a state in which a game ball can enter when transitioning to the specific control state ( A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a variable winning device 38),
A plurality of game balls that flow down the game area can be held, and a ball entry assist means for assisting entry of the game ball into the variable winning device is provided.
The entry assisting means,
An auxiliary main body portion (electrical accessory 37a, 37a3 and upper electric accessory 37a1) located upstream of the flow path of the game ball entering the variable winning device,
An auxiliary drive unit (electrical accessory driving unit 37b and upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1) that is set to a holding state or a non-holding state by driving the auxiliary main body unit;
The auxiliary drive unit,
By setting the auxiliary main body part in the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is held, and by setting the auxiliary main body part in the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. In this way, release the game ball held by the auxiliary body,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow of the game ball that has passed through the auxiliary main body portion, which has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area enters the special winning opening, and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area does not enter An open/close door (open/close door 38b) located on the downstream side of the road;
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door,
The variable winning drive unit, after setting the open/close door in an open state, sets the open/close door in a closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The auxiliary main body is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening after setting the open/close door to the open state. , The auxiliary main body is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the auxiliary main body is larger than a predetermined number of game balls. More than a predetermined number of game balls can be inserted into the winning opening, and it is possible to easily over-win. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body unit is inserted into the special winning opening.

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to the open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body unit is inserted into the special winning opening. More than a predetermined number of game balls can be inserted into the winning opening, and it is possible to easily over-win.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 or the feature B2 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening/closing door is located vertically below the auxiliary main body.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, since the opening/closing door is located vertically below the auxiliary body, the auxiliary drive is released from the auxiliary body by setting the auxiliary body to the non-holding state. The game ball will fall freely toward the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can easily enter the game ball held by the auxiliary body into the special winning opening.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening timing that sets the opening and closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body part is inserted into the special winning opening,
A second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the auxiliary main body is not inserted into the special winning opening,
The gaming machine sets the opening/closing door to an open state at any one of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine sets the opening/closing door in an open state so that the gaming ball released from the auxiliary main body portion is put into the special winning opening, and the big winning. The opening/closing door is set to the open state so as not to enter the mouth. The opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening times, so that the player can play the game ball released from the auxiliary main body part. We will pay attention to whether or not to enter the special winning opening. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B4 of the present invention group,
The auxiliary body is
A first auxiliary body (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area;
A second auxiliary main body (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding a larger number of game balls than the first auxiliary main body;
The auxiliary drive section (upper electric accessory driving section 37b1 and lower electric accessory driving section 37b2) is
After setting the first auxiliary main body portion in the open state, the first auxiliary main body portion is set in the closed state to release the game ball held by the first auxiliary main body portion. 1 auxiliary opening and closing state,
After setting the second auxiliary main body portion in the open state and then setting the second auxiliary main body portion in the closed state, the game ball held by the second auxiliary main body portion is released. With 2 auxiliary opening and closing states,
The gaming machine is set to any one of the first auxiliary opening/closing state and the second auxiliary opening/closing state.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine flows down the first auxiliary opening/closing state in which the first auxiliary main body part capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the gaming area is opened and closed, and the gaming area. Since a plurality of game balls can be held and a second auxiliary body part that can hold more game balls than the first auxiliary body part is opened or closed is set to any one of the second auxiliary open/closed states. By setting the second auxiliary opening/closing state, it is possible to insert more game balls into the special winning opening than in the case of setting the first auxiliary opening/closing state. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second auxiliary main body portion opens/closes, and thus the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B5 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising closed-time effect executing means (a closed-time effect determination process of step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect when the auxiliary main body is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary drive section. ..

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, since the gaming machine is provided with the closing time effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the auxiliary main body section is set to the non-holding state by the auxiliary drive section, for example, After the auxiliary main body is set in the non-holding state by the auxiliary drive unit, it is possible to notify the player by executing a predetermined effect whether it is in the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state for the player. it can. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features B1 to B6 of the present invention group,
The auxiliary body is
An advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive unit,
When the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive unit, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the auxiliary drive unit holds the auxiliary main body by setting the auxiliary main body in the holding state and then setting the auxiliary main body in the non-holding state. To release. Further, the auxiliary main body portion has an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive part, and an advantageous side when the game ball is released by the auxiliary drive part. It has a disadvantageous holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the holding position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the game ball with the auxiliary drive unit, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game. ..

According to the feature B group of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is provided with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball enters the actuation opening (starting ball entering means), whereby an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

However, since the variable prize winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area is entered, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. There is a problem of doing.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the lottery means to be executed (right actuation port 37) and the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the lottery means, a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is established. A game provided with a game state transition means (main control device 60) for transitioning the game state, and a variable winning device (variable winning device 38) for transitioning to a state in which a game ball can enter when transitioning to the specific control state. Machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means,
A guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means (electric Character 37a),
A guide piece drive part (electric accessory part drive part 37b) for setting the open state or the closed state by driving the guide piece,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow path of a game ball that has passed through the guide piece and has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted into the special winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The gaming machine is
Period adjusting means for adjusting the relay period after the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the closed state and then sets the open/close door in the variable winning drive section (step S907A small hit). A game machine provided with a start standby time setting process).

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state. Since the gaming machine is provided with period adjusting means for adjusting the relay period after the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive section and before the opening/closing door is set to the open state by the variable winning a prize drive section, , The relay period can be adjusted by the period adjusting means so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening. According to this, the player pays attention to the relay period after the guide piece drive section sets the guide piece in the closed state and then the variable prize winning drive section sets the open/close door in the open state. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening time that sets the opening and closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening,
A second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece is not inserted into the special winning opening,
The game machine characterized in that the period adjusting means adjusts the relay period by setting the opening/closing door to an open state at any one of the first opening time and the second opening time. ..

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the period adjusting means sets the opening/closing door to the open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece is inserted into the special winning opening, and the big winning. The opening/closing door is set to the open state so that it does not enter the mouth. The opening/closing door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening times, so that the player can play the game ball released from the guide piece to a large size. We will pay attention to whether or not to enter the prize hole. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 or the feature C2 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, since the opening and closing door is located vertically below the guide piece, the game piece released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall freely toward the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can easily make the remaining gaming balls held by the guide piece enter the special winning opening.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open/close door in the open state, the open/close door is set in the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the variable winning a prize drive unit sets the open/close door to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening after setting the open/close door to the open state. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the gaming machine has a big winning opening. More game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be entered, and over-winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C4 of the present invention group,
A holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means is
A holding body portion (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece,
A holding drive unit (a plate drive unit 50a) for setting the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit,
The holding drive unit,
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing the game ball held by the holding body in this manner.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the holding body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body section in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body section in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C5 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising a closing time effect executing means (a closing time effect determination process of step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, since the gaming machine is provided with the closing time effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, for example, After setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, it is possible to notify the player of whether it is in the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state for the player by executing a predetermined effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features C1 to C6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
An advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit,
When the game piece is released by the guide piece drive unit, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half surface of the plate surface of the electric auditors object 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece. .. In addition, the guide piece is advantageous when the game piece is released by the guide piece drive section, and an advantageous side holding position that guides the game ball to a path that is advantageous to the player, and when the guide piece drive section releases the game ball. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit, the game machine can improve the player's attention to the game. it can.

According to the feature group C of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is provided with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball enters the actuation opening (starting ball entering means), whereby an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

However, since the variable prize winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area is entered, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. There is a problem of doing.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area formed on the front of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when entering the game ball. Based on the result of the lottery means to be executed (right actuation port 37) and the internal lottery executed when the game balls enter the lottery means, a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player is established. A game provided with a game state transition means (main control device 60) for transitioning the game state, and a variable winning device (variable winning device 38) for transitioning to a state in which a game ball can enter when transitioning to the specific control state. Machine (pachinko machine 10),
The lottery means,
A guide piece (upper side) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing game ball flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means (upper side) An electric accessory 37a1 and a lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (upper side electric accessory driving unit 37b1 and lower side electric accessory driving unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece;
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow path of a game ball that has passed through the guide piece and has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted into the special winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece,
The gaming machine is
A game machine characterized by comprising a holding amount adjusting means (a process for supporting electric hand of step S306B) for adjusting an amount of holding a game ball with the guide piece.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive unit releases the game ball held by the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the open state and then setting the guide piece in the closed state. Since the gaming machine is provided with a holding amount adjusting means for adjusting the holding amount of the game ball, by adjusting the holding amount adjusting means to increase the holding amount of the game ball, a big winning opening is obtained. It is possible to make it easy to enter a game ball. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
A guide piece lottery means (processing of step S1301) for executing a lottery to set whether or not to set the guide piece to the open state,
The holding amount adjusting means,
A game machine characterized in that the amount of holding a game ball in the guide piece is adjusted based on the result of the lottery by the guide piece lottery means.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the holding amount adjusting means adjusts the amount of holding the game ball with the guide piece based on the lottery result of the guide piece lottery means, so that the player has the guide piece lottery means. You will pay attention to the lottery result. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or the feature D2 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
And a second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive section (the upper electric accessory driving section 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2) is
After setting the first guide piece in the open state, by setting the first guide piece in the closed state, the first opening/closing for releasing the game ball held by the first guide piece State and
After setting the second guide piece in the open state, by setting the second guide piece in the closed state, the second opening/closing for releasing the game ball held by the second guide piece. State and
The game machine characterized in that the holding amount adjusting means sets one of the first open/closed state and the second open/closed state.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the holding amount adjusting means flows down the first and second open/close states in which the first guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed. Since a plurality of game balls can be held and a second guide piece that can hold more game balls than the first guide piece is opened or closed is set to either state, By setting the open/closed state, as compared with the case of setting the first open/closed state, it is possible to insert a large number of game balls into the special winning opening. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A game machine characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece is inserted into the special winning opening.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening. A game ball can be surely put in the mouth.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D4 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, since the opening/closing door is located vertically below the guide piece, the game ball released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall freely toward the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can easily make the remaining gaming balls held by the guide piece enter the special winning opening.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open/close door in the open state, the open/close door is set in the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the closed state based on the entry of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening after setting the open/close door to the open state. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the gaming machine has a big winning opening. More game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be entered, and over-winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features D1 to D6 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening time that sets the opening and closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening,
A second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece is not inserted into the special winning opening,
The gaming machine sets the opening/closing door to an open state at any one of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine sets the opening/closing door in the open state so that the gaming ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening, and the special winning opening. The open/close door is set to the open state so that the player does not enter the ball. The open/close door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening times, so that the player can win the game ball released from the guide piece. We will pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D7 of the present invention group,
A holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means is
A holding body portion (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece,
A holding drive unit (a plate drive unit 50a) for setting the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit,
The holding drive unit,
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing the game ball held by the holding body in this manner.

According to the feature D8 of the present invention group, the holding body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game sphere held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body section in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body section in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body can be released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising a closing time effect executing means (a closing time effect determination process of step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature D9 of the present invention group, since the gaming machine is provided with the closing time effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, for example, After setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, it is possible to notify the player of whether it is in the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state for the player by executing a predetermined effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features D1 to D9 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
An advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit,
When the game piece is released by the guide piece drive unit, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half surface of the plate surface of the electric auditors object 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature D10 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece. .. In addition, the guide piece is advantageous when the game piece is released by the guide piece drive section, and an advantageous side holding position that guides the game ball to a path that is advantageous to the player, and when the guide piece drive section releases the game ball. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit, the game machine can improve the player's attention to the game. it can.

According to the feature group D of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is provided with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball enters the actuation opening (starting ball entering means), whereby an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

However, since the variable prize winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area is entered, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. There is a problem of doing.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board and a game ball flowing down the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when the game ball is entered. It is advantageous for the player based on the starting ball entering means (the central operating port 36 and the right operating port 37) to be executed and the result of the internal lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the starting ball entering means. A game state transition means (main control device 60) for transitioning the game state to a specific control state (opening/closing execution mode), and a variable winning device for transitioning to a state in which a game ball can enter when transitioning to the specific control state ( A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a variable winning device 38),
A holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means is
A holding body (plate 50),
A holding drive unit (a plate drive unit 50a) for setting the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit,
The holding drive unit,
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. In this way, release the game ball held by the holding body,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow of the game ball that has passed through the holding main body portion, which has an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area enters the special winning opening and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area does not enter An open/close door (open/close door 38b) located on the downstream side of the road;
A game machine comprising: a variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the opening/closing door of the variable winning device is located on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball that has passed through the holding body. Then, the holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body section in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body section in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can easily make the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area into the special winning opening.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the holding drive unit is set to drive the holding main body unit to repeat a holding state and a non-holding state so as to perform a single vibration.

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the holding drive unit drives the holding main body unit to set the holding state and the non-holding state so as to make a single vibration, so that the gaming machine holds the holding unit. The configuration of can be simplified.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 or the feature E2 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the opening/closing door is located vertically below the holding body.

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, since the opening/closing door is located vertically below the holding body, the holding body is released from the holding body by setting the holding body to the non-holding state. The game ball will fall freely toward the door. Therefore, the game machine can easily enter the game ball held by the holding body into the special winning opening.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features E1 to E3 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open/close door in the open state, the open/close door is set in the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The holding body is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the holding body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. A gaming machine to do.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the variable winning a prize drive unit sets the open/close door to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening after setting the open/close door to the open state. , The holding main body is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the holding main body is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. It is possible to easily enter more game balls than the predetermined number of game balls into the winning opening, and it is possible to easily over-win. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature E group of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is provided with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball enters the actuation opening (starting ball entering means), whereby an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes is known. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, moving the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.

However, since the variable prize winning device pays out a predetermined game ball when the game ball flowing down the game area is entered, the payout of the game ball becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game is lowered. There is a problem of doing.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a lottery means (right operation port 37) for executing,
The lottery means,
A guide piece (an electric accessory) that can hold a game ball flowing down in the game area and has an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing the game ball flowing down in the game area from entering the lottery means. 37a, 37a3, the upper electric accessory 37a1, and the lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (electrical accessory driving unit 37b, upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1, and lower electric auditor product driving unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece. ,
The gaming machine is provided with a closing time effect executing means (a closing time effect determining process of step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece driving unit. And a gaming machine.

According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, since the gaming machine is provided with the closing time effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, for example, After setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, it is possible to notify the player of whether it is in the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state for the player by executing a predetermined effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The closing effect production means sets the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, and when it is in the advantageous state for the player, the player is told to be in the advantageous state for the player. By executing the advantageous state notification effect (high-expectation effect) which is notified to, and setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, when the player is in a disadvantageous state, A gaming machine characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification effect (low expectation effect) for informing a player of a disadvantageous state.

According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the closing effect producing means is advantageous for the player when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the closed state, which is advantageous for the player. When the player is in a disadvantageous state when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state by executing the advantageous state notification effect that informs the player that the game is in the state, it is disadvantageous to the player. Since a disadvantageous state notification effect for notifying the player that the game is in such a state is executed, the player pays attention to the predetermined effect executed by the closing time effect executing means.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F2 of the present invention group,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed upon the entry of the game ball into the lottery means, the game state transition means (main control) for transitioning the game state to a specific control state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player. Device 60),
And a variable winning device (variable winning device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when it shifts to the specific control state,
The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow path of a game ball that has passed through the guide piece and has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted into the special winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the guide piece. Release the remaining game balls held in,
The variable winning drive unit,
The opening and closing door is set to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening,
When the closing effect production means sets the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, when there is a high degree of expectation that more than a predetermined number of game balls will enter the special winning opening. By executing the advantageous state notification effect and setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, when the expectation of inserting more than a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening is low. A gaming machine characterized by executing a disadvantageous state notification effect.

According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game ball held by the guide piece is released, and the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening. To do. In other words, the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. According to this, the gaming machine can insert the remaining game balls held by the guide piece into the special winning opening, and can pay out a predetermined game ball when entering the game balls. .. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Also, the closing time effect executing means sets the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, so that it is advantageous when there is a high expectation that more than a predetermined number of game balls will enter the special winning opening. By executing the notification effect and setting the guide piece to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, the disadvantageous state notification effect is produced when the expectation of inserting more than a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening is low. Since it is executed, the player pays attention to the predetermined effect executed by the closing effect executing means.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, since the opening/closing door is located vertically below the guide piece, the game ball released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall freely toward the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can easily make the remaining gaming balls held by the guide piece enter the special winning opening.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in the characteristic F3 or the characteristic F4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open/close door in the open state, the open/close door is set in the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the variable winning a prize drive unit sets the open/close door to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening after setting the open/close door to the open state. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the gaming machine has a big winning opening. More game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be entered, and over-winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F3 to F5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening time that sets the opening and closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening,
A second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece is not inserted into the special winning opening,
The gaming machine sets the opening/closing door to an open state at any one of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine sets the opening/closing door in the open state so that the gaming ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening, and the special winning opening. The open/close door is set to the open state so that the player does not enter the ball. The open/close door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening times, so that the player can win the game ball released from the guide piece. We will pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F3 to F6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
And a second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive section (the upper electric accessory driving section 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2) is
After setting the first guide piece in the open state, the first guide piece is set in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the first guide piece in the closed state. A first open/closed state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide piece are released,
After setting the second guide piece in the open state, the second guide piece is set in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the second guide piece in the closed state. With a second open/closed state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide piece,
The gaming machine is set to any one of the first open/closed state and the second open/closed state.

According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first open/closed state in which a first guide piece that can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area is opened and closed, and a plurality of game machines flowing down the game area. Since the game ball can be held and the second guide piece that can hold more game balls than the first guide piece is set to either the second open/closed state or the second open/closed state, the second open/close By setting the state, as compared with the case of setting the first open/closed state, it is possible to insert a large number of game balls into the special winning opening. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F3 to F7 of the present invention group,
A holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means is
A holding body portion (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece,
A holding drive unit (a plate drive unit 50a) for setting the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit,
The holding drive unit,
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing the game ball held by the holding body in this manner.

According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the holding body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game sphere held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body section in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body section in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features F1 to F8 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
An advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous to the player when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit,
When the game piece is released by the guide piece drive unit, it has a disadvantageous side holding position (right half surface of the plate surface of the electric auditors object 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state to release the game ball held by the guide piece. .. In addition, the guide piece is advantageous when the game piece is released by the guide piece drive section, and an advantageous side holding position that guides the game ball to a path that is advantageous to the player, and when the guide piece drive section releases the game ball. It has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the side holding position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the position of the game ball when releasing the game ball with the guide piece drive unit, the game machine can improve the player's attention to the game. it can.

According to the feature group F of the present invention as described above, since the player's attention to the game can be improved, the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is provided with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball enters the actuation opening (starting ball entering means), whereby an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes is known. The gaming machine, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, shifting the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.
By the way, as a kind of such an operation port, it is possible to hold a game ball flowing down the game area and open it to enter the operation port, and a closed state where the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter the operation port. There is known an operation port provided with a guide piece having the guide piece and a guide piece drive section which is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece.

However, since the guide piece is monotonically set to the open state or the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

<Feature G group>
Features G1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of the game board and a game ball flowing down through the game area are entered, and an internal lottery is carried out when the game ball is entered. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) including a lottery means (right operation port 37) for executing,
The lottery means,
A guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means and a closed state for preventing game balls flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means (electric Accessory 37a, 37a3, upper electric accessory 37a1, and lower electric accessory 37a2),
A guide piece drive unit (electrical accessory driving unit 37b, upper electric accessory driving unit 37b1, and lower electric auditor product driving unit 37b2) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece. ,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the guide piece. Release the remaining game balls held in,
The guide piece is
An advantageous side holding position (the left half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is advantageous for the player when releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece drive unit,
When releasing the remaining game balls by the guide piece drive portion, a disadvantageous side holding position (right half surface of the plate surface of the electric accessory 37a) that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position, A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to the feature G1 of the present invention group, the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means. By doing so, the remaining game balls held by the guide piece are released. In addition, the guide piece releases the remaining game ball by the guide piece drive part, and an advantageous side holding position that guides the player to a path that is advantageous to the player when the guide piece drive part releases the remaining game ball. In this case, it has a disadvantageous side holding position that leads to a path that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous side holding position. Therefore, since the player pays attention to the position of the remaining game ball when releasing the remaining game ball with the guide piece drive unit, the gaming machine improves the player's attention to the game. be able to.

Features G2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G1 of the present invention group,
The advantageous side holding position leads to a path advantageous to the player by inserting a predetermined number of game balls into the winning opening when entering the game ball, and the disadvantage side holding position is A game machine characterized in that when entering a ball, the number of game balls less than a predetermined number of game balls is introduced into a payout opening for paying out, so that the game machine is led to a route that is disadvantageous to the player.

According to the feature G2 of the present invention group, the advantageous side holding position is led to a path advantageous to the player by causing a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out at the time of entering the game ball, which is disadvantageous. The side holding position guides the player to a path that is disadvantageous to the player by allowing the player to enter a winning opening that pays out a smaller number of game balls than a predetermined number of game balls when entering the game ball. When the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece drive unit, the position of the game balls will be further noted.

Features G3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G2 of the present invention group,
Based on the result of the internal lottery executed upon the entry of the game ball into the lottery means, the game state transition means (main control) for transitioning the game state to a specific control state (open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player. Device 60),
And a variable winning device (variable winning device 38) that shifts to a state in which a game ball can enter when it shifts to the specific control state,
The variable winning device,
A special winning opening (special winning opening 38a) for paying out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow path of a game ball that has passed through the guide piece and has an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is inserted into the special winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is not inserted An opening/closing door (opening/closing door 38b) located on the downstream side of
A variable winning drive unit (variable winning drive unit 38c) that is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door,
The guide piece is
When the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece drive unit, the disadvantageous side holding position that leads to the path for entering the special winning opening,
When the remaining game balls are released by the guide piece drive unit, it has the advantageous side holding position that leads to a path for entering a winning opening (general winning opening 35D) different from the special winning opening,
The variable winning drive unit,
A game machine characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state so that the game ball at the disadvantageous side holding position released from the guide piece is inserted into the special winning opening.

According to the feature G3 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the opening/closing door to the open state so that the game ball in the disadvantageous side holding position released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening. In other words, the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the open state at the timing when the guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece to the closed state. According to this, the game machine can enter the game ball in the disadvantageous holding position among the remaining game balls held by the guide piece into the special winning opening. At the time of entering the game ball, A predetermined number of game balls can be paid out. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

In addition, the guide piece has an advantageous side holding position that leads to a path for entering a winning opening different from the special winning opening when releasing the remaining game balls with the guide piece driving unit, so the gaming machine Among the remaining game balls held by the guide piece, the game ball at the advantageous side holding position can be inserted into a winning opening different from the special winning opening. More game balls can be paid out than the other game balls. Therefore, when the player releases the remaining game balls with the guide piece drive unit, the player further pays attention to the position of the game balls.

Features G4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 of the present invention group,
The opening/closing door is located vertically below the guide piece.

According to the feature G4 of the present invention group, since the opening/closing door is positioned vertically below the guide piece, the game ball released from the guide piece by setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit. Will fall freely toward the door. Therefore, the gaming machine can easily make the remaining gaming balls held by the guide piece enter the special winning opening.

Features G5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature G3 or the feature G4 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open/close door in the open state, the open/close door is set in the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

According to the feature G5 of the present invention group, the variable winning drive unit sets the open/close door to the open state, and then sets the open/close door to the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening. , The guide piece can hold a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area so that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than a predetermined number of game balls, so that the gaming machine has a big winning opening. More game balls than a predetermined number of game balls can be entered, and over-winning can be facilitated. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G6.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G3 to G5 of the present invention group,
The variable winning drive unit,
A first opening time that sets the opening and closing door to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening,
A second opening timing for setting the opening/closing door in an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece is not inserted into the special winning opening,
The gaming machine sets the opening/closing door to an open state at any one of the first opening time and the second opening time.

According to the feature G6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine sets the opening/closing door in an open state so that the gaming ball released from the guide piece enters the special winning opening, and the special winning opening. The open/close door is set to the open state so that the player does not enter the ball. The open/close door is set to the open state at any one of the second opening times, so that the player can win the game ball released from the guide piece. We will pay attention to whether or not the ball enters the mouth. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G7.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G3 to G6 of the present invention group,
The guide piece is
A first guide piece (lower electric accessory 37a2) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
And a second guide piece (upper electric accessory 37a1) capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and holding more game balls than the first guide piece,
The guide piece drive section (the upper electric accessory driving section 37b1 and the lower electric accessory driving section 37b2) is
After setting the first guide piece in the open state, the first guide piece is set in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the first guide piece in the closed state. A first open/closed state in which the remaining game balls held by the guide piece are released,
After setting the second guide piece in the open state, the second guide piece is set in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the second guide piece in the closed state. With a second open/closed state for releasing the remaining game balls held by the guide piece,
The gaming machine is set to any one of the first open/closed state and the second open/closed state.

According to the feature G7 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has a first open/closed state in which the first guide piece that can hold a plurality of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area is opened and closed, and a plurality of gaming machines flowing down the gaming area. Since the game ball can be held and the second guide piece that can hold more game balls than the first guide piece is set to either the second open/closed state or the second open/closed state, the second open/close By setting the state, as compared with the case of setting the first open/closed state, it is possible to insert a large number of game balls into the special winning opening. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the second guide piece opens and closes, so that the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

Features G8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features G3 to G7 of the present invention group,
A holding means for holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area,
The holding means is
A holding body portion (plate 50) located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece,
A holding drive unit (a plate drive unit 50a) for setting the holding state or the non-holding state by driving the holding body unit,
The holding drive unit,
By setting the holding body to the holding state, a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area are held, and by setting the holding body to the non-holding state, it does not interfere with the game ball flowing down the game area. A game machine characterized by releasing the game ball held by the holding body in this manner.

According to the feature G8 of the present invention group, the holding body is located on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball held by the guide piece. Then, the holding drive unit holds the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area by setting the holding body section in the holding state, and flows down the game area by setting the holding body section in the non-holding state. The game ball held by the holding body is released so as not to interfere with the game ball. According to this, the holding means can surely hold the plurality of game balls flowing down the game area on the guide piece.

Features G9.
In the gaming machine described in any of the features G1 to G8 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized by comprising a closing time effect executing means (a closing time effect determination process of step S2117A) that executes a predetermined effect when the guide piece driving unit sets the guide piece to the closed state.

According to the feature G9 of the present invention group, since the gaming machine is provided with the closing time effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect when the guide piece is set to the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, for example, After setting the guide piece in the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, it is possible to notify the player of whether it is in the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state for the player by executing a predetermined effect. Therefore, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game.

According to the feature group G of the present invention as described above, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game, so that the following problems can be solved.

Conventionally, it is provided with a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front surface of a game board, and the game ball enters the actuation opening (starting ball entering means), whereby an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery is performed. A gaming machine that executes is known. The gaming machine, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, shifts the gaming state from the normal control state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the game machine pays out a large amount of game balls by, for example, shifting the variable winning device to a state where the game balls can enter.
By the way, as a kind of such an operation port, it is possible to hold a game ball flowing down the game area and open it to enter the operation port, and a closed state where the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter the operation port. There is known an operation port provided with a guide piece having the guide piece and a guide piece drive section which is set to an open state or a closed state by driving the guide piece.

However, since the guide piece is monotonically set to the open state or the closed state by the guide piece drive unit, there is a problem that the player's attention to the game is lowered.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

10... Pachinko machine, 35... General winning opening, 36... Upper working opening, 37... Lower working opening, 38... Variable winning device, 38a... Large winning opening, 38b... Opening/closing door, 38c... Variable winning driving section, 39... Out Mouth, 47... Symbol display device, 60... Main control device, 62... MPU, 90... Audio emission control device, 92... MPU, 100... Display control device, 102... MPU.

Claims (3)

Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and lottery means for entering a game ball flowing down the game area and executing an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game ball. , Based on the result of the internal lottery executed upon the entry of the game ball into the lottery means, a game state transition means for transitioning the game state to a specific control state advantageous to the player, and the specific control state A gaming machine including a variable winning device that shifts to a state where a game ball can enter when the game ball shifts,
The lottery means,
A guide piece capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area and having an open state for entering the lottery means, and a closed state for preventing the game ball flowing down the game area from entering the lottery means,
By driving the guide piece, a guide piece drive unit for setting an open state or a closed state,
The variable winning device,
A big winning opening that pays out a predetermined game ball when entering a game ball,
A flow path of a game ball that has passed through the guide piece and has an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is inserted into the special winning opening and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is not inserted An opening and closing door located on the downstream side of
By driving the opening/closing door, a variable winning a prize drive unit that is set to an open state or a closed state,
The guide piece drive unit sets the guide piece in the open state and then sets the guide piece in the closed state based on the entry of at least one game ball into the lottery means, thereby setting the guide piece. Release the remaining game balls held in,
The variable winning drive unit,
A game machine characterized in that the opening/closing door is set to an open state so that the game ball released from the guide piece is inserted into the special winning opening. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The opening/closing door is located vertically below the guide piece. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The variable winning drive unit,
After setting the open/close door in the open state, the open/close door is set in the closed state based on the entrance of a predetermined number of game balls into the special winning opening,
The guide piece is capable of holding a plurality of game balls flowing down the game area such that the number of game balls released from the guide piece is larger than the predetermined number of game balls. Machine.

Images